Toyota 2019 Yaris Owner's Manual

Before driving

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or N

(manual transmission), fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. ( 

P. 107)

Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. ( 

P. 107, 117)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

 P. 114)

Wear the seat belt correctly. ( 

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (

 P. 28)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

( 

P. 57)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see the rear of the vehicle clearly, by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. ( 

P. 119, 121)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button

Fastening the rear center seat belt

1 Take out the plates, and then pull the seat belt.

Push the plate into the buckle in the order of plate “A” and plate

“B” until a clicking sound is heard.

Plate “A”, buckle “A”

Plate “B”, buckle “B”

Plate “A”

Buckle “A”

Plate “B”

Buckle “B”

Releasing and stowing the rear center seat belt

1 To release the hooked buckle

“B”, push the buckle release button.

2 To release the hooked plate “A”, insert the plate “B”, the key into the hole on the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, retract it slowly.

3 Stow the plates as shown in the illustration.

4 Stow the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seat)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision, or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, or a rear impact.

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. ( 

P. 59)

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

 P. 57)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. ( 

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seats and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

WARNING

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( 

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

 P. 28)

■ When children are in the vehicle

 P. 68

■ Seat belt pretensioners

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

■ When using the rear center seat belt

● Do not use the rear center seat belt with either buckle released.

Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.

● Do not allow anyone sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

◆ SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

SRS driver knee airbag

Can help provide driver protection

SRS seat cushion airbags

Can help restrain the driver and front passenger

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS curtain shield airbags

● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

SRS airbag system components

Curtain shield airbags

Side impact sensors (front)

Side airbags

Side impact sensors (rear)

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

Passenger seat cushion airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Side impact sensors (front door)

Driver seat cushion airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Driver knee airbag

Front impact sensors

Airbag sensor assembly

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Front passenger airbag

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors, etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than

10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (

 P. 57)

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and driver knee airbags deploy.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

● Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys and accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the

SRS driver knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver’s seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS driver knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags and seat cushion airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags and seat cushion airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising, etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -

18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

● The SRS seat cushion airbags on the front seats will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

● Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The front seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

 Type A

 Type B

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Conditions and operations in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult * 1

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG ON”

Off

* or

2 flashing

* 3

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Devices

Activated

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

* 2 or deactivated

* 3

Activated

■ Child * 4

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

“AIR BAG OFF” or

“AIR BAG ON”

* 4

Off

* 2 or flashing

* 3

Deactivated or activated

* 4

Devices

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Activated

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Deactivated or activated

* 2,4

Activated

■ Child restraint system with infant * 5

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG

OFF”

* 6

Off

* 2 or flashing

* 3

Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

■ There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG OFF”

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

* 1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2

: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

* 3

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

* 4

: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

* 5

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (

 P. 57)

* 6

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. ( 

P. 59)

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

 P. 59)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your

Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substances to the human body are included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases contain harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the back door closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.

● Use the rear door child-protector lock (5-door models only) or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.

● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats, etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Points to remember...................................................................... P. 57

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.

● Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.

Table of contents

Child restraint system .................................................................. P. 59

When using a child restraint system ............................................ P. 60

Child restraint system installation method

• Fixed with a seat belt ............................................................... P. 63

• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor ............................... P. 69

• Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap) ......................... P. 72

Points to remember

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

● Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.

● Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

WARNING

■ When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is provided in this manual.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Holding a child in your or someone else’s arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

■ Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

● If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment.

Child restraint system

■ Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.

Installation method Page

Seat belt attachment

P. 63

Child restraint

LATCH anchors attachment

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attachment

P. 69

P. 72

When using a child restraint system

■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install a child restraint system to a rear seat. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system.

● Raise the seatback as much as possible

● Move the seat to the rearmost position

● If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint

WARNING

■ When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

WARNING

■ When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder.

● Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

◆

Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

■ Rear-facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

is unavoidable, refer to P. 60 for front passenger seat adjustment.

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (

 P. 68)

■ Forward-facing — Convertible seat

If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat

2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

( 

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

4 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. ( 

P. 72)

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (

 P. 68)

is unavoidable, refer to P. 60 for front passenger seat adjustment.

■ Booster seat

1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat

2 High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (

 P. 114)

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

 Booster type  High back type

4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. ( 

◆ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. ( 

P. 31)

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor

■ Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the rear outboard seats.

(Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

■ Installation with LATCH system

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

1 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

( 



With flexible lower attachments

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

 With rigid lower attachments

Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

P. 72)

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (

 P. 68)

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.

Anchor brackets

■ Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

Remove the luggage cover. ( 

P. 332)

Remove the head restraint. ( 

3 Secure the child restraint system using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt.

4 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Top tether strap

Hook

5 Reinstall the luggage cover.

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.

● Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

● When a child restraint system with a top tether strap is installed, do not install the head restraint. The head restraint may interfere with the top tether strap preventing secure installation of the child restraint system.

● Make sure to properly store the removed head restraint in a secure place when you use the child restraint system on the rear seat.

NOTICE

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged.

Engine immobilizer system



The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The system begins operating after the key has been removed from the engine switch. The system is canceled after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle



: If equipped

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

 U.S.A.

 Canada

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (except Canada)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles.

Do not remove under penalty of law.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Warning lights and

indicators .......................... 78

Gauges and meters ............ 83

Multi-information display ..... 85

Fuel consumption

information ........................ 89

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and dashboard inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.



Vehicles without tachometer



Vehicles with tachometer

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

(Except Canada)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light ( 

Brake system warning light ( 

(Canada)

ABS warning light

( 

P. 422)

Electric power steering system warning light

( 

P. 422)

Charging system warning light ( 

Low engine oil pressure warning light (

 P. 421)

(Flashes or illuminates)

1, 3

PCS warning light

( 

P. 422)

Slip indicator

( 

(Red)

* 1

(Except Canada)

High engine coolant temperature warning light ( 

(Yellow)

* 2

Malfunction indicator lamp (

(Yellow)

Malfunction indicator lamp (

Automatic High Beam indicator ( 

Cruise control indicator

( 

LDA indicator

( 

(Canada)

* 1

(Yellow)

* 4

SRS warning light

(

Lane marker indicators

( 

(Yellow)

ABS warning light

(

Open door warning light

( 

(Except Canada)

Low fuel level warning light ( 

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

( 

P. 424)

(If equipped)

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light ( 

Maintenance required reminder light (

 P. 424)

(Except Canada)

Tire pressure warning light ( 

P. 424)

(Except Canada)

* 1

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2

: If equipped

* 3

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating and come on to indicate a malfunction.

* 4

: The lights turn on with LDA indicator to indicate a malfunction.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

 P. 154)

Low engine coolant temperature indicator

(Blue)

* 1, 4

Headlight high beam indicator (

 P. 158)

Eco Driving Indicator

Light ( 

P. 130)

(Green)

Automatic High Beam indicator (

 P. 194)

(Green)

Front fog light indicator

(

 P. 161)

Cruise control indicator

( 

P. 199)

“SET” indicator

( 

P. 199)

LDA indicator

(

 P. 189)

PCS activation indicator

( 

P. 178)

(Green)

(Flashes)

1, 7

Lane marker indicators

(

 P. 190)

PCS warning light

( 

P. 181)

(Green)

* 1, 5

Slip indicator ( 

P. 214)

* 1, 6

“AIR BAG ON/

OFF” indicator

(

 P. 49)

“TRAC OFF” indicator

(

 P. 214)

(Except Canada)

1, 6

“AIR BAG ON/

OFF” indicator

(

 P. 49)

(Canada)

* 1

VSC off indicator

(

 P. 215)

* 1

* 2

: If equipped

* 3

: The light turns on to indicate the engine coolant temperature is low.

* 4

: Vehicles with an automatic transmission

* 5

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

* 6

: This light illuminates on the center panel.

* 7

: The light comes on when the system is turned off.

* 8

: The light flashes in yellow to indicate that the vehicle is deviating from the lane.

WARNING

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or turns on. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely.

( 

P. 451)

Gauges and meters

Tachometer (if equipped)

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Display change button



P. 85

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. ( 

P. 85)

Clock adjusting buttons



P. 87

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

On vehicles with a tachometer, do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data including the clock.

Display contents

Clock (

 P. 87)

Outside temperature display

( 

P. 88)

Shift position and gear step position indicator * ( 

P. 149)

Drive information (

 P. 86)

: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only

Changing the display

Items displayed can be switched by pressing the display change button.

Drive information

■ Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■ Trip meters

■

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Pressing and holding the display change button while the trip meter is displayed will reset the trip meter to “0”.

Driving range

■

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch to the “LOCK” position, the display may not be updated.

Average fuel consumption

■

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

• The function can be reset by pressing and holding the display change button when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Displays the instantaneous of fuel consumption.

■ Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was last started.

Eco Driving Indicator Light customization (Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Eco Driving Indicator Light can be activated or deactivated by pressing the display change button when the Eco Driving Indicator Light customization display is displayed.

To change the Eco Driving Indicator Light customization display, display the odometer and press and hold the display change button until the display changes.

After customization, press the display change button for more than 2 seconds to return to the odometer.

Clock

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

Adjust the hours

Adjust the minutes

Outside temperature display

The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of

-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

■ Display

■

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than

16 mph [25 km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

When “  ” or “E” is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your

Toyota dealer.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The following information data will be reset.

● Driving range

● Average fuel consumption

● Average vehicle speed

● Clock data

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal display, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing



P. 182

NOTICE

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

Fuel consumption information

The fuel consumption information can be displayed on Entune

Audio and Entune Audio Plus screen.

Display the trip information or past record screen

 Vehicles with Entune Audio

Press the “CAR” button.

 Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus

Press the “APPS” button, and then select “Eco” on the screen.

Fuel consumption

■ Trip information

If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

Resetting the consumption data

Average vehicle speed since the engine was started

Elapsed time since the engine was started

Fuel consumption in the past

15 minutes

Cruising range (

 P. 90)

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to the “ON” position. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

These images are examples only.

Keys .................................... 92

■ Past record

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)

Previous fuel consumption record

Current fuel economy

Update the average fuel consumption data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

These images are examples only.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors........................... 97

Back door.......................... 102

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ........................ 107

Rear seats......................... 110

Head restraints.................. 114

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel .................. 117

Inside rear view mirror ...... 119

Outside rear view

mirrors............................. 121

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows ................. 123

Keys

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

 Vehicles without an engine immobilizer system

Master keys

Key number plate

 Vehicles with an engine immobilizer system (type A)

Master keys

Key number plate

 Vehicles with an engine immobilizer system (type B)

Master keys

Operating the wireless remote control function

Key number plate



Vehicles with an engine immobilizer system (type C)

Master keys

Operating the wireless remote control function

Key number plate

Wireless remote control (if equipped)

 Type A

Locks all the doors ( 

P. 97)

Check that the door is securely locked.

Sounds the alarm

(press and hold) (

 P. 94)

Unlocks all the doors ( 

P. 97)



Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Type B

Locks all the doors ( 

P. 97)

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks all the doors (

 P. 97)

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Sounds the alarm

(press and hold) (

 P. 94)

■ If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying a key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Panic mode (if equipped)

When is pressed for longer than about

1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the wireless remote control.

■ Conditions affecting operation (wireless remote control)

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations:

● When the wireless key battery is depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication devices

● When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

■ Key battery depletion

If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.

■ Customization that can be configured at your Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

 P. 486)

■ Certification for the wireless remote control

 U.S.A.

 Canada

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

Observe the following:

● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

● Do not disassemble the wireless remote control key.

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the keys, wireless remote control or door lock switch.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

◆

Wireless remote control (if equipped)



Type A

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

 Type B

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

◆ Keys

Turning the key operates the doors as follows:

■ Driver’s door

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key again unlocks the other doors.

■ Front passenger’s door

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

■ Operation signals (vehicles with a wireless remote control)

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/ unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■ Security feature (vehicles with a wireless remote control)

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

◆ Door lock switch

Unlocks all the doors

Locks all the doors

◆

Inside door lock buttons

Locks the doors

Unlocks the doors

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the inside door lock button is in the lock position.

Locking the front door from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.

2 Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the key is in the engine switch.

100

Rear door child-protector lock (5-door models only)

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

■ Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the back door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).

■ Conditions affecting the operation of the wireless remote control



P. 94

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features

 P. 486)

101

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock all the doors.

● Ensure that all the doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● 5-door models only: Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

102

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following procedures.

Unlocking and locking the back door

◆

Wireless remote control (if equipped)

 P. 97

◆

Keys

From the back door (vehicles without wireless remote control):

Unlocks all the doors

Locks all the doors

From the side door:

 P. 98

◆

Door lock switch

 P. 99

Opening the back door from outside the vehicle

Raise the back door while pushing up the back door opener switch.

The back door cannot be closed immediately after the back door opener switch is pushed.

When closing the back door

Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.

103

■ Operation signals (vehicles with a wireless remote control)

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/ unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■ Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the back door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).

■ Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment lights turn on when the back door is opened.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

● Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.

In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

104

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

■ Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

105

WARNING

● The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

● When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers, etc., from being caught.

● When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay.

Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.

● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.

106

NOTICE

■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.

● Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.

● Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

 Driver’s seat

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Vertical height adjustment lever

(if equipped)

107

 Front passenger’s seat

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Seatback lock release lever

(3-door models only)

108

Moving front passenger’s seat for rear seat entry (3-door models only)

■ Getting in or out the vehicle

For easy access to the rear seat, use the seatback lock release lever or seatback angle adjustment lever. When the seatback lock release lever or seatback angle adjustment lever is used, the seat’s original position is memorized, so the seat may be returned to that original position. The seatback will be returned to the fully upright position.

Lift the seatback lock release lever or seatback angle adjustment lever.

The seatback will fold forward, and the seat’s slide lock will be released.

Move the seat all the way forward.

■ Seat slide position memory function (3-door models only)

Slide the seat backward and then lift the seatback. The seat will be set and locked to its previous slide position automatically, and the seatback will be returned to the fully upright position.

In the following situations, the seat slide position memory will not be saved or will be overwritten.

● The seatback is lifted upright at a slide position farther forward than the memorized position.

● The seat slide position is memorized when the seat is slid all the way or nearly all the way forward.

● The seat is slid farther back than the memorized position by using the seat position adjustment lever.

■ If the seat cannot be returned to the memorized slide position

Lift the seatback lock release lever or seatback angle adjustment lever after removing the luggage, or after having the passenger get out or sit properly so that the seat can be slid back to the previous position.

109

WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■ Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passenger or luggage.

● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

● Never allow anyone to touch seatback lock release levers while the vehicle is moving.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are clear of the seat back path and let them know that the seat is about to move.

■ After returning the seatback to the upright position

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent the seat lock mechanism malfunction

Do not use the seatback angle adjustment lever and seatback lock release lever at the same time. If they are used together, the seat lock mechanism may be damaged.

110

Rear seats

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

1 Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown.

2 Stow the seat belts.

Center:

 P. 30

Outer: Use the seat belt hangers to prevent the belts from being tangled.

Remove the outer head restraints. (

 P. 114)

Lower the center head restraints to the lowest position.

5 Pull the seatback lock release knob and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback may be folded separately.

111

Returning the rear seatbacks

Install the outer head restraints. ( 

Raise the seatback and lock it in place.

When locked, the red label of the lock release knob cannot be seen.

3 Return the seat belt to the original position.

Center:

 P. 30

Outer: Remove the seat belt of the rear outboard seat from the belt hanger.

112

WARNING

■ When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.

● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.

● Do not allow anyone to sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.

● Be careful not to catch your hand when folding the rear seatbacks.

● If it is necessary to detach the head restraints, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Depending on the position of the front seat, it may interfere when trying to fold down the rear seatbacks. If this happens, adjust the position of the front seat.

113

WARNING

■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth.

If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible on the seatback lock release knob. Make sure that the red marking is not visible.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE

■ Stowing the seat belts

The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks.

114

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Adjusting the front seats and rear center seat head restraints

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Removing the front seats and rear center seat head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Removing the rear outer seats head restraints

Pull the lock release knob and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where the head restraints can be removed.

Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Installing the front seat head restraints

Align the head restraint with installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button

115

■ Installing the rear seat head restraints

Rear outer seats: Pull the lock release knob and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where the head restraints can be installed.

Align the head restraint with installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when inserting the head restraint.

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Lock release button

■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when in use.

■ Rear outer seats head restraints

The head restraints do not have adjustment function.

116

WARNING

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

117

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

118

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

Inside rear view mirror

119

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position

Anti-glare position

120

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

 Manually-adjustable type

Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out by pushing the mirror surface.

121



Power-adjustable type

To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

Left

Right

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Right

Down

Left

122

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when (power-adjustable type)

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (

 P. 320)

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving (power-adjustable type)

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

1 Closing

2 Opening

3 One-touch opening (driver’s window only) *

: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

123

Window lock switch

Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

124

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. ( 

P. 123)

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

125

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle............. 126

Cargo and luggage ........... 137

Vehicle load limits ............. 141

Trailer towing..................... 142

Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic

transmission)................... 143

Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual

transmission)................... 144

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch ..... 146

Automatic transmission..... 149

Manual transmission ......... 153

Turn signal lever................ 154

Parking brake .................... 155

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch................ 156

Fog light switch ................. 161

Windshield wipers

and washer ..................... 163

Rear window wiper

and washer ..................... 166

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap .................................. 169

4-5. Toyota Safety Sense C

Toyota Safety Sense C ..... 172

PCS

(Pre-Collision System) .... 178

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert) .... 189

Automatic High Beam ....... 194

4-6. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control.................... 199

Rear view monitor

system ............................ 203

Driving assist systems ...... 213

4-7. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ............. 219

126

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine

 P. 146

Driving

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (

 P. 149)

Release the parking brake. (

 P. 155)

3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

 Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.

( 

P. 153)

Release the parking brake. (

 P. 155)

Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

P. 155), and shift the shift lever to P

127

Stopping

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.



If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (

 P. 149)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to N. ( 

P. 153)

Parking the vehicle

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake ( 

( 

P. 149).

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

128



Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (

 P. 155)

Shift the shift lever to N. (

 P. 153)

If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the wheels as needed.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

Starting off on a steep uphill

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Firmly set the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed, and then shift the shift lever to D.

Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.

3 Release the parking brake.

 Vehicles with a manual transmission

With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.

Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

Release the parking brake.

The hill-start assist control will activate. (→P. 213)

129

■ When starting off on an uphill

■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

● When the accelerator pedal is released

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

130

■ Eco-friendly driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

During Eco-friendly acceleration operation (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator

Light will turn on. When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively, and when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in the following conditions:

● The shift lever is in anything other than

● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

Eco Driving Indicator Light can be activated or deactivated. ( 

P. 87)

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( 

P. 469)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When starting the vehicle (automatic transmission)

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

131

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:

 P. 411

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

 P. 149, 153)

● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

132

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

133

WARNING

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (automatic transmission) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may rupture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

134

WARNING

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

135

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

 Vehicles with a manual transmission

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

● Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

● Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble.

• Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and moving forward.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

• Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

■ When parking the vehicle (automatic transmission)

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

136

NOTICE

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( 

P. 431)

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil and transmission fluid, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

137

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

● Be sure all items are secured in place.

● To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage evenly within the luggage compartment.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity)  (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5  150) =

650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

138

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( 

P. 458)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B * 2 lb. (kg)  A * 1 lb. (kg) = C * 3 lb. (kg)

* 1

: A = Weight of people

* 2

: B = Total load capacity

* 3

: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of

D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced

E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg)  D * 4

lb. (kg) = E * 5

lb. (kg)

* 4 : D = Additional weight of people

* 5 : E = Available cargo and luggage load

139

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

● Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations:

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the luggage cover

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

140

WARNING

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

141

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): ( 

P. 458)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

◆ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.

( 

P. 376)

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

142

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

143

Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

144

Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual transmission)

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground

To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures before towing:

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.

Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices are turned off.

Release the parking brake.

After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before driving the vehicle.

■ Necessary equipment and accessories

Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Contact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recommended equipment.

NOTICE

■ Dinghy towing direction

Do not tow the vehicle backward.

Doing so may cause serious damage.

145

■ To prevent the steering from locking

Ensure the engine switch is in the “ACC” position.

146

Engine (ignition) switch

Starting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P (automatic transmission) or N

(manual transmission).

Firmly depress the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission).

Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.

Changing engine switch positions

“LOCK”

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (Vehicles with an automatic transmission:

The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)

“ACC”

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“ON”

All electrical components can be used.

“START”

For starting the engine.

147

■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”

Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission). ( 

P. 149, 153)

Push in the key and turn it to the

“LOCK” position.

■ If the engine does not start (vehicles with an engine immobilizer system)

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. ( 

P. 74)

Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK” position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and right.

■ Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.

148

WARNING

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (

 P. 411)

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods of time without the engine running.

■ When starting the engine

● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring system.

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission



Shifting the shift lever

149

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose

Shift position

Function

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

Position for engine braking

Position for more powerful engine braking

Position for maximum engine braking

: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.



: If equipped

150

■ Downshift restriction

The maximum allowable speeds are as follows.

Downshifting

D  3

3  2

2  L

Maximum speed mph (km/h)

84 (135)

53 (85)

25 (40)

■ AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.

AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.

■ When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to 3 because cruise control will not be canceled. (

 P. 201)

■ Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is being depressed.

151

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

152

WARNING

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an resulting in death or serious injury.

Manual transmission



Shifting the shift lever

153

Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly.

If it is difficult to shift in reverse, shift the shift lever to N, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.

■ Maximum downshifting speed

Observe the downshifting speeds in the following table to prevent overrevving the engine.

mph (km/h)

Shift position

Maximum speed

30 (49)

57 (92)

83 (134)

113 (181)



: If equipped

154

Turn signal lever

Operation instructions

Right turn

Lane change to the right (push and hold the lever partway)

The right hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

Lane change to the left (push and hold the lever partway)

The left hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

Left turn

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

Parking brake

Operation instructions

To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal.

To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

155

Except

Canada

■ Parking the vehicle



P. 127

■ Usage in winter time



P. 220

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

156

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually.

Operation instructions

Operating the



Type A

switch turns on the lights as follows:

Off

Vehicles with daytime running light system:

The daytime running lights turn on. ( 

P. 158)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights

(

 P. 158) turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.



Type B

Off

Vehicles with daytime running light system:

The daytime running lights turn on. ( 

P. 158)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights

(

 P. 158) turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.

 Type C

The daytime running lights turn on. (

 P. 158)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights

(

 P. 158) turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.

The daytime running lights turn off.

157

158

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)

 Vehicles with reflector type headlights

● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the headlights and illuminate dimmer than the headlights.

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the position

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate even if the parking brake is set again.

● For type C of this headlight, daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

159

 Vehicles with projector type headlights

● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the position

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate even if the parking brake is set again.

● For type C of this headlight, daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Automatic High Beam



P. 194

■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■ Automatic light off system (vehicles with daytime running light system)

● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)

● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or turn the headlight switch to or once and then back to the or

position.

If any of the doors is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

160

■ Battery-saving function (vehicles with daytime running light system)

In all following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged:

● The engine switch is in the “LOCK” position.

● The headlights and/or tail lights are on.

This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:

● When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.

● When the light switch is operated.

● When the door is opened or closed.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. automatic light off system) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

 P. 487)

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

161

Fog light switch



The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

Operation instructions

 Type A

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on



: If equipped

162



Type B

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the

 Type A

lever operates the wipers as follows:

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

163

Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

164



Type B

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

5 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wiper will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked, if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

165

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wiper, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

166

Rear window wiper and washer

Operation instructions

Operating the lows:

switch operates the rear wiper or washer as fol-

 Vehicles without intermittent rear wiper (Type A)

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

Washer operation



Vehicles without intermittent rear wiper (Type B)

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

Washer operation

167

 Vehicles with intermittent rear wiper

Intermittent wiper operation window

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

The wiper will automatically operate a couple of time after the wiper squirts.

168

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked, if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

4-4. Refueling

169

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

● Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

● Confirm the type of fuel.

■ Fuel types



P. 469

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

WARNING

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

170

4-4. Refueling

WARNING

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

4-4. Refueling

171

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

172

Toyota Safety Sense C

The Toyota Safety Sense C consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

Driving assist systems

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

 P. 178

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

 P. 189

◆ Automatic High Beam

 P. 194

WARNING

■ Toyota Safety Sense C

The Toyota Safety Sense C is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

173

Front sensor

The front sensor is located on the upper side of the windshield. It consists of 2 types of sensors, each of which detects information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

Laser sensors

Front camera

WARNING

■ Front sensor

The front sensor uses lasers to detect vehicles ahead of your vehicle. The front sensor is classified as class 1M laser product according to the IEC

60825-1 standard. Under normal usage conditions, these lasers are not harmful to the naked eye. However, it is necessary to observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the loss of eyesight or severe visual impairment.

● To avoid hazardous laser radiation exposure, never attempt to disassemble the front sensor (e.g. remove the lenses). When disassembled, the front sensor is classified as a class 3B laser product according to the IEC

60825-1 standard. Class 3B lasers are hazardous and pose a risk of eye injury under direct exposure.

174

WARNING

● Do not attempt to look into the front sensor with a magnifying glass, microscope or other optical instrument within a distance of less than 3.9 in. (100 mm).

Laser classification label

Laser explanatory label

Laser emission data

Maximum average power: 45 mW

Pulse duration: 33 ns

Wave length: 905 nm

Divergence (horizontal  vertical): 28°  12°

175

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the front sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times. If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield. If the inner side of the windshield in front of the front sensor is dirty, contact your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the front sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 4.0 in. (10 cm) below the bottom of the front sensor

B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)

(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front sensor)

● Do not install or attach anything to the inner side of the windshield under the front sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: Approximately 4.0 in. (10 cm) (Starting from the bottom of the front sensor)

B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)

(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front sensor)

● If there is a large difference in temperature between the inside and outside of the vehicle, such as in winter, the windshield is likely to fog up easily. If the part of the windshield in front of the front sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, the PCS warning light may illuminate and the system may be temporarily disabled. In this case, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, etc. (

 P. 319)

● If the area of the windshield in front of the front sensor is covered with water droplets, use the windshield wipers to remove them.

If the water droplets are not sufficiently removed, the performance of the front sensor may be reduced.

176

WARNING

● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your

Toyota dealer.

● Do not attach window tint to the windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not get the front sensor wet.

● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the front sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not subject the front sensor to a strong impact.

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the front sensor or remove it.

● Do not disassemble the front sensor.

● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the front sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

● Do not attach anything to or place anything on the dashboard.

■ Installation area of front sensor on windshield

When the windshield is fogging up easily, the glass around the front sensor may be hot due to the heater running. If the glass is touched, it may result in burns.

177

■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal operating conditions are detected, the PCS warning light will turn off and the system will become operational.

If the PCS warning light continues flashing or remains illuminated, contact your Toyota dealer.

Situation

When the area around the front sensor is covered with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign matter

Actions

To clean the part of the windshield in front of the front sensor, use the windshield wipers or the windshield defogger (

 P. 319).

When the temperature around the front sensor is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment

If the front sensor is hot, such as after the vehicle is parked in the sun, use the air conditioning system to decrease the temperature around the front sensor.

If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sunlight reflected from the surface of the sunshade may cause the temperature of the front sensor to become excessively high.

If the front sensor is cold, such after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front sensor.

The area in front of the front sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the part of the windshield in front of the front sensor.

Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to clear the obstruction.

● If the PCS warning light continues flashing or remains illuminated even after the normal operating conditions have returned and the vehicle has been driven for some time, contact your Toyota dealer.

178

 P. 178) in front of the vehicle. When the system determines

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

The pre-collision system uses the front sensor to detect objects

(

that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( 

P. 181)

Detectable objects

The system can detect the following:

 P. 181

● Vehicles

● Pedestrians

System functions

■ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and the PCS activation indicator will flash to urge the driver to take evasive action.

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

179

■ Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, a buzzer will sound and the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the collision.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: 

P. 184

• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: 

P. 186

● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself

Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking

● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

180

WARNING

● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

● While driving, such as when driving through a railway crossing, the system may determine that the possibility of a collision with an object, such as railway crossing barrier, is high and operate the pre-collision braking function.

To move the vehicle in an emergency, such as if the system operates in a railway crossing, perform the following operations and then take the necessary measures to ensure your safety.

• If the vehicle has been stopped, depress the accelerator pedal.

• If the vehicle is decelerating, fully depress the accelerator pedal.

(

 P. 184)

• Disable the pre-collision system. ( 

P. 181)

■ When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed

● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely

● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly inflated

● When tires of a size other than specified are installed

● When tire chains are installed

● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Disabling the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or more.

The PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed in the meter, when the system is turned off.

To enable the system, press the

PCS switch again.

The system is enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

181

182

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

Press the PCS switch to turn the PCS activation indicator on and display the current warning timing on the meter. Each time the PCS switch is pressed while the current warning timing is displayed, the timing for the warning changes as follows:

The warning timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off. However, if the pre-collision system is disabled and re-enabled, the operation timing will return to the default setting (middle).

Early

Middle

This is the default setting.

Late

183

■ Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

● Pre-collision warning

Detectable objects

Vehicles

Pedestrians

Vehicle speed

Approx. 10 to 85 mph

(15 to 140 km/h)

Approx. 10 to 40 mph

(15 to 65 km/h)

Relative speed between your vehicle and object

Approx. 10 mph

(15 km/h) or more

Approx. 10 mph

(15 km/h) or more

● Pre-collision brake assist

Detectable objects

Vehicles

Pedestrians

Vehicle speed

Approx. 20 to 50 mph

(30 to 80 km/h)

Approx. 20 to 40 mph

(30 to 65 km/h)

Relative speed between your vehicle and object

Approx. 20 mph

(30 km/h) or more

Approx. 20 mph

(30 km/h) or more

● Pre-collision braking

Detectable objects

Vehicles

Pedestrians

Vehicle speed

Approx. 7 to 50 mph

(10 to 80 km/h)

Approx. 7 to 40 mph

(10 to 65 km/h)

Relative speed between your vehicle and object

Approx. 7 mph

(10 km/h) or more

Approx. 7 mph

(10 km/h) or more

The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

184

■ Object detection function

The system detects objects based on their size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. ( 

P. 186)

The illustration shows an image of detectable objects.

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a detectable object, etc.

• When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object, etc.

• When approaching a detectable object in an adjacent lane or on the roadside, such as when changing the course of travel or driving on a winding road

• When rapidly closing on a detectable object, etc.

• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as detectable objects, guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls

• When there is a detectable object or other object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

185

• When there are patterns or paint in front of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

• When overtaking a detectable object that is changing lanes or making a right/left turn

• When passing a detectable object while making a right/left turn

• When passing a detectable object in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

• When a detectable object approaches very close and then stops before entering the path of your vehicle

• If the front of your vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when on an uneven or undulating road surface

• When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a laser reflecting object (manhole cover, reflective plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of your vehicle

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.

• When the vehicle is being parked in a place where there is a low hanging object at the height of the front sensor

186

• When the windshield is covered with raindrops, etc.

• When approaching an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects that may contact your vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When driving through steam or smoke

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

● In some situations such as the following, an object may not be detected by the radar sensor and front camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle

• When your vehicle or a detectable object is wobbling

• If a detectable object makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

• When your vehicle approaches a detectable object rapidly

• When a detectable object is not directly in front of your vehicle

• When a detectable object is near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.

• When a detectable object is under a structure

• When part of a detectable object is hidden by an object, such as large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail

• When multiple detectable objects are close together

• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a detectable object

• When a detectable object is a shade of white and looks extremely bright

187

• When a detectable object appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as its surroundings

• If a detectable object cuts or suddenly emerges in front of your vehicle

• When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

• When a very bright light ahead, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the front camera sensor

• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle ahead is a bicycle or motorcycle

• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a personal mobility vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If a pedestrian ahead is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• If a pedestrian is wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• If a pedestrian is bending forward or squatting or bicyclist is bending forward

• If a pedestrian is moving fast

• If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel, making a detectable object appear to be nearly the same color as its surroundings

• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• If your vehicle is skidding

188

 P. 181), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds

• When driving on a hill

• When there is a laser reflecting object (manhole cover, reflective plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of your vehicle

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

■ If VSC is disabled

● If VSC is disabled (

braking functions are also disabled.

● PCS warning light will turn on.

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

189

Summary of function

While driving on a road that has lane markers, this system recognizes the lane markers using a camera as a sensor to alert the driver when the vehicle deviates from its lane.

If the system judges that the vehicle has deviated from its lane, it alerts the driver using a buzzer and indications on the meter.

Front sensor

Turning the LDA system on

Press the LDA switch to activate the system.

The LDA indicator will come on.

Press the switch again to turn the

LDA system off.

The LDA system will remain on or off even if the engine switch is turned to “ON” position.

190

Operating conditions

● When the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more

● When the lane width is more than approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)

● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m)

Indication on the meter

When both of the lane marker indicators turn green:

Indicates that both right and left lane markers are recognized.

If the vehicle deviates from the lane, the lane marker indicators of the deviated side will flash yellow.

When either of the lane marker indicators turns green:

Indicates that the lane marker on the green-marked side is recognized.

If the vehicle deviates from a lane on the side with the recognized lane markers, the lane marker indicators will flash in yellow.

When both of the lane marker indicators turn off:

Indicates that no lane markers are recognized or the LDA system is temporarily canceled.

191

■ Temporary cancelation of the LDA system functions

If any of the following occurs, the LDA system functions will be temporarily canceled. The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.

● The turn signal lever is operated.

● The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system functions.

● When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving.

● When the lane departure warning sounds.

The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.

■ The lane departure warning

Depending on the audio system sound level or air conditioning fan noise while the audio system or air conditioning system is in use, it may be difficult to hear the warning sound.

■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LDA system may not be immediately available. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the front sensor ( 

P. 189)

becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.

■ If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle

The lane departure warning will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not be recognized.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following situations, the front sensor may be unable to recognize lane markers causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly.

However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

● When driving through an area, such as a tollbooth, a crossing or before a ticket checkpoint

● When driving on a sharp curve

● When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide

● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper tire inflation pressure

● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short

● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.)

● When the lane markers are broken, Botts’ dots (raised pavement markers) or stones

192

● When the lane markers are on a curb etc.

● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.

● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow covers the lane markers

● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete

● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light

● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to or exit from a tunnel

● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the camera lens

● When driving on roads that are branching or merging

● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water, etc.

● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement

● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when the headlights are misaligned

● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven

● When driving on rough or unpaved roads

● When the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield

● When the heater is blowing to the feet, the upper part of the windshield may get fogged up and have a negative effect

● When cleaning the inside of the windshield, touching the lens or getting glass cleaner on the lens may have a negative effect

■ When changing the tires

Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.

■ If the LDA indicator comes on in yellow

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

193

WARNING

■ Before using the LDA system

Do not rely solely on the LDA system. The LDA system does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely.

Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.

■ To avoid operating the LDA by mistake

Switch the LDA system off using the LDA switch when not in use.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA system

● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension. If your suspension needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

194

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle front sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in

position.

Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on green when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

195

Conditions when high beams automatically turn on or off

When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on:

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights turned on.

● There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:

● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).

● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on.

● There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

Turning the high beam on/off manually

■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High

Beam system again.

196

■ Switching to high beam

Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the Headlight high beam indicator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the

Automatic High Beam system again.

■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ Front sensor detection information

● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another

• When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to turn off.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles

• The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles

• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side

• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

197

● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.

● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• The windshield is cracked or damaged.

• The front sensor is deformed or dirty.

• The front sensor temperature is extremely high.

• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or are not aimed properly.

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.

• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks, etc.).

• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.

• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.

• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.

• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.

• The vehicle is listing or titling, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

■ If the Automatic High Beam indicator comes on in yellow

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

198

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.

• The headlight switch is in .

• The headlight switch lever is in low beam position.

• Automatic High Beam switch is on.

Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

Within 30 seconds after

, repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.

If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator is turned on and off 3 times.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even if the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.

NOTICE

■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system

Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.

● Do not overload the vehicle.

● Do not modify the vehicle.

199

Cruise control



Summary of functions

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

“SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.



: If equipped

200

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied or the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) is depressed.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

201

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in the D or range 3. (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

■ If the cruise control indicator comes on in yellow

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

202

WARNING

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● During emergency towing

Rear view monitor system

203

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines on screen while backing up, for example while parking.

The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in R and the engine switch is in the “ON” position.

The rear view monitor system will be deactivated when the shift lever is in any position other than R.

204

Using the rear view monitor system

■ Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to R while the engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicle width guide lines

The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

Vehicle center guide line

This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1.5 ft.

(0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft.

(1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Rear view monitor system precautions

■ Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

The image adjustment procedure for the rear view monitor system screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the multimedia screen. (

 P. 237)

• The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.

• Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.

• The camera uses a special lens.

The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

Corners of bumper

205

206

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view monitor system is located as shown in the illustration.

● Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

■ Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

207

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are.

In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

208

● When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

A margin of error

■ When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

● Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown in the illustration, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

● Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point

. However, in reality if you back up to point

, you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that

is closest and

is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to

and

is the same, and

is farther than

and

209

210

Things you should know

■ If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Likely cause

 The image is difficult to see

• The vehicle is in a dark area

• The temperature around the lens is either high or low

• The outside temperature is low

• There are water droplets on the camera

• It is raining or humid

• Foreign matter (mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera

• Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera

• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.

 The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera.

 The image is out of alignment

The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.

Solution

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)

The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor system is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen.

( 

P. 237)

Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

211

Likely cause

 The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment

Solution

The camera position is out of alignment.

• The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)

• The vehicle is used on an incline.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.

WARNING

■ When using the rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.

The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.

Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

● The instructions given are only guide lines.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc., when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

212

WARNING

● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow

• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire

• When the back door is not closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.

● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle before proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. ( 

P. 206)

NOTICE

■ How to use the camera

● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.

• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Driving assist systems

213

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

◆ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

◆

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

 P. 178

214

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release .

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.

Press back on.

again to turn the system

215

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

for more than 3

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light and the VSC off indicator light will come on.

Press again to turn the systems back on.

Pre-collision brake assist and Pre-collision braking will also be disabled. The

PCS warning light will come on. ( 

P. 188)

■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

has not

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

● When the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position

● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases

If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

216

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.

Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline).

● Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in a position other than R when starting off forward on an upward incline, or the shift lever is in

R when starting off backward on an upward incline.

● The vehicle is stopped.

● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.

● The parking brake is not engaged.

■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is shifted to P or N.

● Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is shifted to R when starting off forward on an upward incline, or the shift lever is shifted to other than R when starting off backward on an upward incline.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed.

● The parking brake is engaged.

● Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.

217

WARNING

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

218

WARNING

■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

219

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

220

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, if the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P * .

: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

Cross chain

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

221

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.

● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

● If wheel ornaments are used, they will be scratched by the chain band, so remove the ornaments before putting on the chains. (

 P. 436)

222

WARNING

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

● Do not use tires of noticeably different wear level.

■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert).

Audio system types........... 226

223

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

224

Multimedia system

5-1. Basic Operations

Audio system .................... 227

Steering wheel audio

switches .......................... 229

USB port/AUX port............ 230

Basic audio operations...... 231

5-2. Setup

Setup menu....................... 233

General settings................ 234

Audio settings ................... 236

Display settings................. 237

Voice settings.................... 238

5-3. Using the multimedia system

Selecting the audio

source ............................. 239

List screen operation......... 240

Optimal use of

the multimedia system .... 242

5-4. Using the radio

Radio operation................. 243

225

Multimedia system

5-5. Playing an audio CD and

MP3/WMA/AAC discs

CD player operation .......... 245

5-6. Using an external device

Listening to an iPod .......... 251

Listening to a USB

memory device................ 255

Using the AUX port ........... 260

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth

Preparations to use wireless

communication................ 261

Registering a Bluetooth

® audio player

for the first time ............... 265

Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time ... 266

Registering a Bluetooth

device.............................. 267

Connecting a Bluetooth

device.............................. 269

Displaying a Bluetooth

device details .................. 271

Detailed Bluetooth

system settings ............... 272

5-8. Bluetooth

audio

Listening to Bluetooth

audio ............................... 274

5-9. Bluetooth

phone

Using a Bluetooth

phone.............................. 275

Making a call ..................... 277

Receiving a call................. 280

Speaking on the phone ..... 281

Bluetooth

phone

message function............ 284

Using the steering wheel

switches .......................... 288

Bluetooth

phone

settings ........................... 289

Contact/Call History

Settings........................... 291

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)............ 301

5-10.Bluetooth

Bluetooth

......................... 305

5-11.Using the voice command system

Voice command system.... 309

226

Audio system types

 Entune Audio

 P. 227

 Entune Audio Plus

Refer to the “MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

227

Audio system

Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free phone and changing multimedia system settings are started by using the following buttons.

Audio system operation buttons

button

Press this button to access the Bluetooth ® hands-free system.

( 

P. 275)

“CAR” button

Press this button to access the fuel consumption screen.

( 

P. 89)

“SETUP” button

Press this button to customize the function settings. ( 

P. 233)

“AUDIO” button

Display the “Select Audio Source” screen or audio top screen.

( 

P. 239)

228

 P. 237) or remove your sunglasses.

Operating the touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the multimedia system, etc.

■ Drag *

■

Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.

● Scrolling the lists

Flick *

Touch the screen with your finger and then quickly move the screen by flicking your finger.

● Scrolling the main screen page

: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

■ When using the touch screen

● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display

Settings” screen (

● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the touch screen

● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your finger.

● Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.

● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

Steering wheel audio switches

229

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of multimedia system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the multimedia system or navigation system.

Operating the multimedia system using the steering wheel switches

Volume switch

• Press: Increases/decreases volume

• Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume

Radio mode:

• Press: Selects a radio station

• Press and hold: Seeks up/ down

CD, MP3/WMA disc, Bluetooth ® , iPod or USB mode:

• Press: Selects a track/file/song

• Press and hold: Fast-forward/rewind

“MODE” switch

• Changes audio source

• Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation

To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.

WARNING

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

230

USB port/AUX port

Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the USB/AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB” or

“AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen and the device can be operated via multimedia system.

Connecting using the USB/AUX port

● iPod

Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

● USB memory

Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.

Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.

● Portable audio player

Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.

Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.

■ AUX port

The AUX port only supports audio input.

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.

231

Basic audio operations

Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are explained in this section.

Operating the multimedia system

Press this button to eject a disc

Insert a disc into the disc slot

Audio source selection screen appears (

 P. 239)

Turn this knob to select radio station bands, tracks and files. Also the knob can be used to select items in the list display.

Press to pause or resume playing music.

Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button to seek up or down for a radio station, or to access a desired track or file.

Setting the Sound (

 P. 242)

Pause or resume playing music

Select to enable repeat play

Select to enable random playback

Press: Turns the multimedia system on and off.

Turn: Adjusts the volume.

232

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the multimedia system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the multimedia system is operating.

WARNING

■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment would void the user’s authority to operate this device.

● Laser products

CAUTION: THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT.

USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF

PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY

RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN

COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING

TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL

INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the multimedia system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

■ To avoid damaging the multimedia system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the multimedia system.

233

Setup menu

You can adjust the multimedia system to your desired settings.

Display “Setup” screen

Press the “SETUP” button to display the “Setup” screen.

Select to adjust the settings for operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (

 P. 234)

Select to set the voice settings.

( 

P. 238)

Select to adjust the settings for contrast and brightness of the screen. ( 

P. 237)

Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting and disconnecting Bluetooth

devices. (

 P. 272)

Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, contact, etc.

( 

P. 291)

Select to set audio settings. ( 

P. 236)

Select to turn the screen off.

Select to set the vehicle customization. (

 P. 486)

234

General settings

Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation, etc.

Screen for general settings

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

“English”, “Français” or

“Español” can be selected.

On/off can be selected to sound beeps.

Select to change the screen color.

Select to change the keyboard layout.

The animation effect for the screen can be set to on/off.

Select to delete personal data (

 P. 235)

Select to update program versions. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)

■ To return to the default volume settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

235

Delete personal data

Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.

• General settings

• Audio settings

• Phone settings

236

Audio settings

Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover art, etc.

Screen for audio settings

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

Number of Radio Presets

Select the number of radio preset stations.

Display Cover Art on/off

Automatic Sound Levelizer

Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)

Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.

Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.

■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.

237

Display settings

Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen.

Screen for display settings

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Display” on the “Setup” screen.

Adjust screen contrast/brightness

Adjust screen contrast/brightness of the rear view monitor camera

Changes to day mode.

Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness

Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.

Adjust the display as desired by selecting “+” or “-”.

Day mode

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.

However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day

Mode”.

The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until

“Day Mode” is selected again.

238

Voice settings

This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems setting.

Adjust the voice guidance volume setting.

Set the voice recognition prompts “High”, “Low” or “Off”.

Set the train voice recognition.

Set the voice prompt interrupt on/off.

Set the voice recognition tutorial

■ To return to the default volume settings

Select “Default” and then “Yes”

Selecting the audio source

239

Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are explained in this section.

Selecting the audio source

Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio source selection screen.

If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the “AUDIO” button again.

Select the desired audio source.

Select the desired audio source then or to reorder.

Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source

The audio source changes as follows each time the “MODE” switch is pressed.

240

List screen operation

When a list screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to scroll through the list.

How to scroll

: Select to scroll to the next or previous page.

: If appears to the right of titles, the complete titles are too long for the display. Select this button to scroll the title.

Turn the “TUNE SCROLL” knob to move the cursor box to select a desired item from the list, and press the “TUNE SCROLL” knob to play it. The track that is being played is highlighted.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

241

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs

■ Selecting a track/file/song

Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE

SCROLL” knob to select the desired track/file/song number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “SEEK>” or

“<TRACK” button.

■ Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list

1 Select “Browse” or cover art.

2 Select the desired track/file/ song.

When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used, the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth

device or iPod is being used, the album can be selected.

According to the audio device, the following is displayed.

Audio source

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Bluetooth

USB iPod

List name

Track

Folder, File

Album, Track

Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,

Composers

Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,

Composers, Audiobooks, Videos

242

Optimal use of the multimedia system

On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/

Bass), volume balance can be adjusted.

How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality

1 2 3

4 5

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the treble, mid or bass to a level between -5 and 5.

Select “Front” or “Rear” to adjust the front/rear audio balance.

6 7 Select “L” or “R” to adjust the left/right audio balance.

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.

5-4. Using the radio

243

Radio operation

Select “AM” or “FM” on the audio source selection screen to begin listening to the radio.

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Preset stations

Select to display RBDS text message *

Scanning for receivable station

5 Select to display a list of receivable stations

6 Setting the sound ( 

: FM only

Selecting a station

Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.

■ Seek tuning

Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button.

The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found.

■ Manual tuning

Turn the “TUNE SCROLL” knob.

■ Preset stations

Select the desired preset station.

244

5-4. Using the radio

Setting station presets

Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE SCROLL” knob or pressing the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button.

Select “(add new)”

To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station.

Select “Yes”.

Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.

■ Refreshing the station list

Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” screen.

To cancel the refresh, select “Cancel Refresh”.

■ Reception sensitivity

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted on the roof.

CD player operation

245

Insert disc or select “CD” on the audio source selection screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displaying the track/file list

 MP3/WMA/AAC

Displaying the folder list

Random playback

Repeat play

Pause

Select to resume play

Setting the sound ( 

246

■ Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.

■ Error messages

If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Message

“Check DISC”

“Disc Error”

“No music files found.”

Cause

• The disc is dirty or damaged.

• The disc is inserted upside down.

• The disc is not playable with the player.

There is a malfunction within the system.

No playable data is included on the disc.

Correction procedures

• Clean the disc.

• Insert the disc correctly.

• Confirm the disc is playable with the player.

Eject the disc.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

■ If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

247

■ MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft

Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized

Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)

248

● AAC file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MPEG4/AAC-LC

• Compatible sampling frequencies

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

16-320 (kbps)

Compatible channel modes: 1ch and 2ch

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and

CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

UDF (2.01 or lower)

MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

● Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the multimedia system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.

249

● ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3, WMA and AAC playback

When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or

AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data cannot be played.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than

MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,

WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

250

NOTICE

■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs.

Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).

● Low-quality or deformed discs.

● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.

● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.

■ Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

● Do not apply oil to the player.

● Store discs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

251

Listening to an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Select “iPod” on the audio source selection screen.

When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting the browse screen.

Connecting an iPod

 P. 230

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displays cover art

Selecting the play mode

Shuffle play

Repeat play

Pause

Select to resume playback

Setting the sound ( 

Selecting a play mode

Select “Browse” on the screen.

Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

252

■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod and iPhone may affect wireless performance.

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

■ iPod cover art

● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

● This function can be changed to on/off. (

 P. 236)

● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.

■ iPod functions

● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s multimedia system instead.

● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use.

● Compatible models (

 P. 254)

253

■ iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.

■ Error messages

Cause/Correction procedures Message

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the iPod.”

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“No music files found.”

“No videos found.”

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

This indicates that no video files are included in the iPod.

“There are no songs available for playback. Please add compatible files to your iPod.”

This indicates that songs are not found in a selected playlist.

“iPod authorization unsuccessful.”

This indicates that the display multimedia system failed to authorize the iPod.

Please check your iPod.

254

■ Compatible models

The following iPod

, iPod nano

, iPod classic

® devices can be used with this system.

, iPod touch

and iPhone

● Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)

• iPod touch (4th generation)

• iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (7th generation)

• iPod nano (6th generation)

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPhone 6 Plus

• iPhone 6

• iPhone 5s

• iPhone 5c

• iPhone 5

• iPhone 4S

• iPhone 4

• iPhone 3GS

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone

This system only supports audio playback.

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals

● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

Listening to a USB memory device

255

Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Select “USB” on the audio source selection screen.

Connecting a USB memory device

 P. 230

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displays cover art

Displaying the folder list

Random playback

Repeat play

Pause

Select to resume playback

Setting the sound ( 

Selecting a play mode

Select “Browse” on the screen.

Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

■ Displaying the now playing list

Select the cover art display.

256

■ USB memory functions

● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

● If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.

■ Error messages for USB memory

Cause/Correction procedures Message

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instruction on how to connect the USB device.”

“There are no files available for playback. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”

This indicates a problem with the USB memory device or its connection.

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included on the USB memory device.

■ USB memory

● Compatible devices

USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.

● Compatible device formats

The following device format can be used:

• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

257

● MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

● AAC file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MPEG4/AAC-LC

• Compatible sampling frequencies

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

16-320 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

258

● ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3, WMA and AAC playback

• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than

MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.

259

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals

● Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory device.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

260

Using the AUX port

To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the

“AUDIO” button, then select “AUX” on display the audio control screen.

Connecting a portable audio player

 P. 230

■ Operating portable audio players connected to the multimedia system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.

■ When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio player.

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.

261

Preparations to use wireless communication

The following can be performed using Bluetooth ® wireless communication:

■ A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via multimedia system

■ Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone

In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a

Bluetooth

device by performing the following procedures.

■ About Bluetooth

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

262

■ Certifications for the Bluetooth

 For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: ACJ932YEAP01A727

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION:

Radio frequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of

20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be colocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’lndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if Category II) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.

Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son numéro de modèle s’il fait partie du matériel de catégorie II) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d’antenne

énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l’impédance requise pour chaque type d’antenne. Les types d’antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l’exploitation de l’émetteur.

Device registration/connection flow

1. Register the Bluetooth ® device to be used with multimedia system ( 

P. 265, 266, 267)

263

2. Connect the Bluetooth ® device to be used

( 

To be used for audio To be used for hands-free phone

3. Start Bluetooth ® connection (

 P. 269)

3. Start Bluetooth ® connection ( 

4. Check connection status

( 

P. 274)

4. Check connection status

( 

P. 276)

5. Use Bluetooth ® audio

( 

P. 274)

5. Use Bluetooth ® phone

( 

P. 275)

264

Registering and connecting from the “Bluetooth * Setup” screen

To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button and select “Bluetooth * ” on the “Setup” screen.

Select to connect the device to be used with multimedia system. ( 

Select to register a Bluetooth ® device to be used with multimedia system. ( 

P. 267)

3 Select to set detailed

Bluetooth ® system settings.

( 

P. 272)

4 Select to delete registered devices. (

 P. 268)

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Registering a Bluetooth

the first time

audio player for

265

To use the Bluetooth ® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with the system.

Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the

Bluetooth

Audio.

For details about registering a Bluetooth ® device ( 

P. 267)

Turn the Bluetooth ® connection setting of your audio player on.

Press the “AUDIO” button.

Select “ Audio”.

Select “Select Device”.

Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth ®

. (

device” from step

266

Registering a Bluetooth time

phone for the first

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a

Bluetooth ® phone with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth ® device ( 

P. 267)

Turn the Bluetooth ® connection setting of your cellular phone on.

Press the button.

Select “OK” to register a phone.

Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth ®

(

device” from step

Registering a Bluetooth

device

267

Bluetooth ® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players

(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5

Bluetooth ® devices.

How to register a Bluetooth ® device

Display the “Bluetooth * Setup” screen. (

Select “Add Device”.

When this screen is displayed, search for the name displayed on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth ® device.

For details about operating the

Bluetooth

device, see the manual that comes with it.

To cancel the registration, select

“Cancel”.

device using your Bluetooth

device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth

devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the

Bluetooth

device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth

device according to the confirmation message.

Check that this screen is displayed when registration is complete.

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

268

6 Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connecting...” to “Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Registration can be performed from screens other than the

“Bluetooth * Setup” screen.

■

When registering from the “Bluetooth * Audio” screen

Display the “Bluetooth * Audio” screen. ( 

P. 239)

Select “Select Device”.

Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth ® device” from step 2 (

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Deleting a Bluetooth ® device

Display the “Bluetooth * Setup” screen. (

Select “Remove”.

Select the desired device.

4 A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to delete the device.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Connecting a Bluetooth

device

269

Up to 5 Bluetooth ® devices (Phones [HFP] and audio players

[AVP]) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth

device has been registered, select which device to connect to.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Bluetooth * ”.

Select the device to be connected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

Phone

Audio player

Supported profile icons for currently connected devices will illuminate.

Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Auto connection

To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth * Power” to on.

( 

P. 272)

When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth ® phone in a place where a connection can be established.

When the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.

Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

270

Manual connection

When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth you must connect the Bluetooth ®

* Power” is turned off,

device manually.

● Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth * device” from step 1 .

( 

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Connecting a Bluetooth ® audio player



Registering an additional device

Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth * Audio” screen.

For more information:

 P. 267



Selecting a registered device

1 Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth * Audio” screen.

2 For more information:

 P. 269

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

■ Reconnecting a Bluetooth

phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the system is attempting to connect to a Bluetooth

phone and the Bluetooth

® phone is turned off and then back on, the system will attempt to reconnect.

Displaying a Bluetooth

device details

You can confirm and change the registered device details.

Bluetooth ® device registration status

Display the “Bluetooth * Setup” screen. (

Select the device.

Select “Device Info”.

The following screen is displayed:

Device Name

Change connection method

Bluetooth

Address

Display your telephone number

The number may not be displayed depending on the model of phone.

Compatibility profile of the device

6 Restore default settings

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Changing connection method

Select “Connect Audio Player from”.

Select “Vehicle” or “Device”.

“Vehicle”: Connect the multimedia system to the portable audio player.

“Device”: Connect the portable audio player to the multimedia system.

271

272

Detailed Bluetooth

system settings

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth ® settings.

How to check and change detailed Bluetooth ® settings

Display the “Bluetooth * Setup” screen. (

Select “System Settings”.

The following screen is displayed:

Bluetooth * Power on/off

You can change Bluetooth function on/off

Bluetooth * Name

Change PIN-code

Bluetooth * Address

Display Phone Status

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting a telephone

Display Audio Player Status

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting an audio player

Compatibility profile of the system

8 Restore default settings

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

273

Editing the Bluetooth ® PIN

You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth ® devices in the system.

Select “Bluetooth * PIN”.

2 Input a PIN-code, and select “OK”.

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

274

5-8. Bluetooth

audio

Listening to Bluetooth

audio

The Bluetooth ® audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

When a Bluetooth

device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the “Bluetooth * Audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect the device. ( 

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Audio control screen

Some titles and controls may not be displayed depending on the type of portable audio player used.

Connection status

Battery charge

Indicators

Connection status

Good

Conditions

Not connected

Battery charge

Full Empty

Playing Bluetooth

audio

Select or to Play/Pause.

For details on “Bluetooth * Audio” screen operation methods, refer to

Basic Audio Operations. (

 P. 231)

For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fastforwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. ( 

P. 241)

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Using a Bluetooth

phone

275

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

. Bluetooth

is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call area and signal strength. (

 P. 276)

If a Bluetooth ® device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (

 P. 269)

Phone screen

To display the screen shown below, press the switch on the steering wheel or press the button.

Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.

Device name

Bluetooth ® connection status

276

■ Telephone switch ( 

P. 288)

■ Microphone

The vehicle’s built in microphone is used when talking on the phone.

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth ® phone in the system. (

Status display

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the phone screen.

Connection status

Signal strength

Battery charge

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Good

Full

Conditions

Poor Not connected

Empty

Excellent

“Rm”: Roaming area

Poor

277

Making a call

Once a Bluetooth ® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:

Dialing

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter a phone number.

To delete the input phone number, select .

For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “  ” for a while.

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

Dialing from the contacts list

You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one contact for each registered phone. Up to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact. (

 P. 277)

Display the phone screen. (

Select “Contacts” tab.

Choose the desired contact to call from the list.

Choose the number and then press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

When the contact is empty

You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth ® phone to the system.

Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth ® phones. If the cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer contacts.

278

Press the switch on the steering wheel.



If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.

For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phone and “Automatic Transfer” is off

Select the desired item.

Select to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone, select “Always” and then enable “Automatic Transfer”.

Select to transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone only once.



Select to cancel transferring.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ® phones

Select the desired item.

Select to transfer the contacts from the connected cellular phone.

Select to add a new contact manually.

Select to cancel transferring.

 When “Transfer” is selected

Follow the steps in “Update contacts from phone” from step

( 

P. 292)

 When “Add” is selected

Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list” from step

. (

 P. 294)

279

Calling using favorites list

You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.

Display the phone screen. (

Select “Favorites” tab.

Select the desired number to make a call.

Dialing from call history

You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions below.

: calls which you missed

: calls which you received

: calls which you made

Display the phone top screen. (

2 Select “Call History” tab.



Select or the desired entry from the list.

When is selected

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

 When the desired contact is selected

Select the desired number.

Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Call history list

● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the contacts, the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.

■ International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

280

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

To answer the phone

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

To refuse a call

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

To adjust the incoming call volume

Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

■ International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

281

To adjust the call volume

Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or the volume knob.

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Select “Mute”.

Inputting tones

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact.

Select “0-9”.

Input the number.

■ Release Tones

“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list.

● Select “Release Tones”.

282

■ Release Tones

● A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters “p” or “w”. (e.g.056133w0123p#1  )

● When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed.

● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list.

● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during a call.

To transfer a call

Select “Handset Mode” to on from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call.

Select “Handset Mode” to off from a cellular phone call to a hands-free call.

Transmit volume setting

Select “Transmit Volume”.

Select the desired level for the transmit volume.

Select “OK”.

To hang up

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

283

Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

• Press the switch on the steering wheel.

• Select .

To refuse the call:

• Press the switch on the steering wheel.

• Select .

Every time you press the switch on the steering wheel or select

during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

■ Transferring calls

● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.

● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.

■ Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone.

284

Bluetooth

phone message function

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected

Bluetooth ® phone, enabling checking and replying using the multimedia system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone connected, received messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.

If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used.

Displaying message inbox screen

Press the

Select .

button.

Receiving a message

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.

Select to check the message.

Select to refuse the message.

Select to call the message sender.

285

■ Receiving a message

● Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the navigation system, some information may not be displayed.

● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/

MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:

• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full Screen”. ( 

• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. (

 P. 299)

SMS/MMS:

• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to “Full screen”. (

 P. 299)

• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. ( 

Checking the messages

Display the message inbox screen. (

Select the desired message from the list.

Check that the message is displayed.

E-mails: Select “Mark

Unread” or “Mark Read” to mark mail unread or read on the message inbox screen.

This function is available when

“Update Read Status on Phone” is set to on ( 

Select to make a call to the sender.

Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select

“Stop”.

Select to display the previous or next message.

Select to reply the message.

286

■ Check the messages

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

● Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth

® registered mail address folder.

Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

phone’s

● Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth

® played.

phone can be dis-

● The text of the message is not displayed while driving.

● When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. ( 

● Turn the “PWR  VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume.

● The message read out function is available even while driving.

Replying to a message

Display the message inbox screen. (

Select the desired message from the list.

Select “Quick Message”.

Select the desired message.

Select “Send”.

■ Editing quick reply message

1 Select “Quick Message”.

Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.

Select “OK” when editing is completed.

287

Calling the message sender

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.

Display the message inbox screen. (

Select the desired message.

Select .

Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.

Display the message inbox screen. (

2 Select the desired message.

Select the text area.

Select corresponding to the desired number.

■

5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

Calling from the incoming message screen



P. 283

288

Using the steering wheel switches

The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular phone.

Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches

Volume switch

• Press: Increase/Decrease the volume

• Press and hold: Continuously increase/decrease the volume

On hook switch

• End a call

• Refuse a call

Off hook switch

• Make a call

• Receive a call

• Display “Phone” screen

Bluetooth

phone settings

You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.

289

“Phone/Message Settings” screen

To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Set the phone connection

( 

P. 267)

Sound Settings ( 

P. 290)

Contact/Call History Settings

( 

P. 291)

Set the message settings

( 

Set the phone display

( 

P. 300)

290

Sound setting

Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. ( 

Select “Sound Settings” on the

“Phone/Message screen.

Settings”

Set the desired ringtone.

Adjust the ringtone volume.

Adjust the message readout volume.

Set the desired incoming

SMS/MMS tone.

Adjust the incoming SMS/

MMS tone volume.

Set the incoming e-mail tone.

Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.

Adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice.

■ To return to the default volume settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

291

Contact/Call History Settings

The contacts can be transferred from a Bluetooth ® phone to the system. Contacts can also be added, edited and deleted.

The call history can be deleted and contacts and favorites can be changed.

Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. ( 

Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.

Select the desired item to be set.

For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth ® phones, select to set “Automatic Transfer” on/ off. When set to on, the phone’s contact data and history are automatically transferred.

Select to update contacts from the connected phone.

( 

P. 292)

Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.

Select to add contacts to the favorites list. ( 

P. 296)

Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. ( 

P. 298)

Select to display contact images.

Select to clear contacts from the call history.

Select to add new contacts to the contact list.

* ( 

P. 294)

Select to edit contacts in the contact list.

* ( 

P. 295)

Select to delete contacts from the contact list.

* ( 

P. 296)

11 Select to reset all setup items.

: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones only, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off.

292

Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ® phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.

■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® Phones

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the

Bluetooth

phone.

If another Bluetooth

device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth

device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

293

■ For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ®

Phones

Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth ® phone.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the

Bluetooth

phone.

To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

■

Updating the contacts in a different way (from the “Call History” screen)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (

 P. 291)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

Select “Update Contact”.

Select the desired contact.

Select a phone type for the phone number.

294

Registering a new contact to the contact list

New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. ( 

P. 291)

Select “New Contact”.

Enter the name and select “OK”.

Enter the phone number and select “OK”.

Select the phone type for the phone number.

To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.

■

Registering a new contact in a different way (from the “Call

History” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

Select “Add to Contacts”.

Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list” from step

295

Editing the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (

 P. 291)

Select “Edit Contact”.

Select the desired contact.



Select corresponding to the desired name or number.

For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list” from step 2 . (

 P. 294)

 For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list” from step 3 . (

 P. 294)

■

Editing the contacts in a different way (from the “Contact

Details” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.

Select “Edit Contact”.

“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact.

Follow the steps in “Editing the contact data” from step 3 .

296

Deleting the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (

 P. 291)

Select “Delete Contacts”.

Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

■

Deleting the contact in a different way (from the “Contact

Details” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.

Select “Delete Contact”.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

Favorites list setting

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list.

■ Registering the contacts in the favorites list

1 Select “Add Favorite”.

Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

297



When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list

When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact.

Select the contact to be replaced.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

 Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contacts” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list.



When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in the favorites list.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contact Details” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call History” tab and select the desired contact.

Select “Add Favorite”.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

298

■ Deleting the contacts in the favorites list

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.



Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contacts” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Contacts” tab.

Select at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites list.



When selected, is changed to , and the data is deleted from the list.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the

“Contact Details” screen)

Display the phone screen. (

Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact to delete.

Select “Remove Favorite”.

Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

299

Message Settings

Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. ( 

Select “Messaging Settings”.

Select the desired item to be set.

Set automatic message transfer on/off.

Set automatic message readout on/off.

Set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.

Set the e-mail notification popup on/off.

Set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.

Set updating message read status on phone on/off.

Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.

“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming

SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Change the incoming e-mail display.

“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.

When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed.

300

■ To return to the default volume settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

■ Displaying the “Messaging Settings” screen in a different way

Display the phone screen. ( 

P. 275)

Select .

Select “Settings”.

Phone Display Settings

Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. ( 

Select “Phone Display Settings”.

Select the desired item to be set.

Change the incoming call display.

“Full Screen”: When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

“Drop-Down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of the contact/history transfer completion message on/off.

301

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth ® device, first check the table below.

 When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth ® device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.

The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth

cellular phone.

 For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune

The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version.

 Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (

 P. 305)

302



When registering/connecting a cellular phone

A cellular phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.

 Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.

The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.

 Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration on the phone).

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.

 Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (

 P. 268)

A Bluetooth

connection cannot be made.

Another Bluetooth tem. (

 P. 270)

device is already connected.

 Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this sys-

Bluetooth

function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

 Enable the Bluetooth

function on the cellular phone.

“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.

Bluetooth

function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

 Enable the Bluetooth

function on the cellular phone.

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.

 Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (

 P. 268)

 When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received.

Your vehicle is in a “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” area.

 Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” no longer appears on the display.

303



When using the phonebook

Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data.

 For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.

 Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on.

(

 P. 291)

Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.

 Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).

Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.

 Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the phone).

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.

 Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off.

(

 P. 291)

304



When using the Bluetooth ® message function

Messages cannot be viewed.

Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.

 Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the phone).

Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.

 Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. ( 

P. 299)

New message notifications are not displayed.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.

 Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.

(

 P. 299)

Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.

 Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

 In other situations

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.

 Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.

The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.

 Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cellular phone.

 Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth

connection.

 Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.

 Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

305

Bluetooth

■ When using the Bluetooth

audio system

● In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• If the portable audio player is turned off

• If the portable audio player is not connected

• If the portable audio player’s battery is low

● There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during

Bluetooth

audio play.

● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■ When using the hands-free system

● The multimedia system is muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

If the Bluetooth

phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.

● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If a roof or window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth

● If the cellular phone is turned off

● If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage

● If the cellular phone is not connected

● If the cellular phone’s battery is low

● When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used

● When transferring contact data from the cellular phone

306

■ Bluetooth

antenna

The antenna is built into the display.

If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

■ Battery charge/signal status

● This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular phone itself.

● This system does not have a charging function.

● The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the device is connected to Bluetooth

■ When using the Bluetooth

® time

audio and hands-free system at the same

The following problems may occur.

● The Bluetooth

audio connection may be interrupted.

● Noise may be heard during Bluetooth

audio playback.

■ About the contact in this system

The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

● Contact data

● Call history

● Favorite

● Message

When removing a Bluetooth

phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

307

■ Compatible models

The Bluetooth

audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications

● Bluetooth

specifications:

Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)

This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the multimedia system.

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.

The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.

● Bluetooth

specification:

Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)

This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.

• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)

This is a profile to transfer contact data. When a Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended:

Ver. 1.1)

• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher

This is a profile to transfer contact data.

If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.

308

■ Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:

● Select the portable audio player again

● Enter the portable audio player

■ When you sell your car

Be sure to delete your personal data. (

 P. 235)

WARNING

■ While driving

Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the Bluetooth

system.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth

antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth

® may affect the operation of such devices.

antennas. The radio waves

● Before using Bluetooth

devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular phone.

Voice command system

309

The voice command system enables the hands-free system to be operated using voice commands.

Operations of the voice command system can be performed by selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the screen. Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on all menus can be operated.

Using the voice command system

1 Press the talk switch.

Select to train voice recognition.

Select to start the voice recognition tutorial.

2 Select “OK” and say the desired command.

On the list screen, you can select the desired command.

To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.

310

■ Microphone



P. 276

■ When using the microphone

● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.

● Voice commands may not be recognized if:

• Spoken too quickly.

• Spoken at a low or high volume.

• The roof or windows are open.

• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.

• The air conditioning speed is set high.

• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.

● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible:

• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.

In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation.

Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.

This function is available in English, Spanish and French.

■ Expression examples for each function

“Call

Command

<name>

<type>”

“Dial <number>”

Expression examples

Get me <Robert Brown>.

Call <Robert Brown> on <Work> phone

Dial <3334445555>

Get me <3334445555>

311

Command list

Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below as examples.

 Basic

Command

“Help”

Action

Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands or operation methods

Returns to the previous screen “Go Back”

 Phone

Command

“Redial”

“Call Back”

Action

Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call

Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show

Calls”

Recent

“Dial <phone number>”

“Call <contacts>

<phonetypes>”

Displays the call history screen

Places a call to the said phone number

Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the phone book

312

Mobile Assistant

The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri ® Eyes Free mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth

. ( 

P. 267)

1 Press and hold the on the steering wheel until you hear the beeps.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only when the following screen is displayed.

■

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel”, press the or press and hold the on the steering wheel.

To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the on the steering wheel.

• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command.

• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.

Adjusting the Mobile Assistant volume

The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the

PWR·VOL knob or steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile

Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.

313

■ Notes about Mobile Assistant

● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the connected device.

● Some Siri

features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable function, Siri

will inform you that the function is not available.

● If Siri

is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth error message will be displayed on the screen.

, an

● While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.

● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth

audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts.

314

Air conditioning system ..... 316

315

Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Seat heaters...................... 324

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................ 326

• Interior light ................... 326

• Personal lights .............. 327

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 328

• Glove box...................... 329

• Cup holders .................. 329

• Bottle holders................ 330

• Auxiliary box ................. 331

Luggage compartment

features........................... 332

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ....... 334

• Sun visors ..................... 334

• Vanity mirrors................ 334

• Power outlet.................. 335

• Assist grips ................... 336

316

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning controls

 Vehicles without a cooling and dehumidification on/off button

Air outlet selector dial

Fan speed control dial

Temperature control dial

Rear window defogger switch

Outside/recirculated air mode button

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger



Vehicles with a cooling and dehumidification on/off button

317

Air outlet selector dial

Fan speed control dial

Temperature control dial

Cooling and dehumidification on/off button

Rear window defogger switch

Outside/recirculated air mode button

318

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

 Vehicles without the button

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to increase the temperature.

 Vehicles with the button

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

■

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to “MAX A/C” position and set the outside/recirculated air mode button to recirculated air mode.

Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise

(increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

■

Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan.

Change the airflow mode

To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selector dial to the desired position.

The positions between the air outlet selections can also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

Air flows to the upper body

2 Air flows to the upper body and feet

Air flows to the feet

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates

The windshield defogger operates

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

319

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Set the air outlet selector dial to position.

If the recirculated air mode is used, it will automatically switch to the outside air mode.

In this position, the outside/recirculated air mode cannot be changed to the recirculated air mode.

Perform the following operations accordingly:

● To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.

● To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial.

● Vehicles with the button: If the dehumidification function is not operating, press to operate the dehumidification function.

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

320

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

 Vehicles with a rear window defogger

Defogger is used to defog the rear window.

Press .



The defogger will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Vehicles with rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press .

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected airflow mode.

: Some models

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Adjusting the position, opening and closing the air outlets

 Front center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

321

 Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

322

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Fogging up of the windows

● Vehicles with the button: The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

● Vehicles with the more easily.

button: If you turn off, the windows may fog up

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

■ When the indicator light on button)

goes off by itself (vehicles with the

Press to turn off the dehumidification function and turn it on again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light goes off again. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C) (vehicles with the button)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Air conditioning filter



P. 383

323

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

● Do not set the air outlet selector dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

● Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

■ To prevent burns (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

324

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Seat heaters



WARNING

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

● Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.



: If equipped

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Operating instructions

Turns on the front left seat heater

Turns on the front right seat heater

The indicator light comes on.

325

■ The seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

■ When not in use

Turn the seat heater off.

326

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior light (

 P. 326)

Personal lights (

 P. 327)

Interior light

Off

Door position

6-2. Using the interior lights

327

Personal lights

Off

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/ closed.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

The following lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes:

● Interior light

● Personal lights

● Luggage compartment light

328

List of storage features

Glove box

Cup holders

( 

P. 329)

( 

P. 329)

Bottle holders

Auxiliary box

(

 P. 330)

(

 P. 331)

WARNING

■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may result in the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

329

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Cup holders

■ Front ■ Rear

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders

● Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury.

● To prevent burns, cover hot drinks when placed in the cup holders.

330

Bottle holders

■ When using the bottle holder

● When storing a bottle, close the cap.

● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holders

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary box

 Type A

 Type B

331

Open the cover.

 Type C

WARNING

■ Caution while driving (Type B)

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.

332

Luggage compartment features

Luggage cover

The luggage cover can be removed by the following procedure:

Unhook the cords and return the luggage cover to horizontal position.

2 Lift the luggage cover and pull it toward you to remove it.

6-4. Using the other interior features

Deck board (if equipped)

■ Deck board height adjustment

Upper position

Lower position

The lower position can be used when the deck board is placed on the luggage floor cover.

333

■ Removing the deck board

Lift up the deck board and pull it toward you to remove it.

WARNING

■ When operating the deck board

Do not place anything on the deck board when operating the board. Otherwise, your fingers may be caught or an accident may result causing injuries.

334

Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward. (if equipped)

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

6-4. Using the other interior features

335

Power outlet

Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than

12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

Open the lid.

■ The power outlets can be used when

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

336

6-4. Using the other interior features

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

WARNING

■ Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

337

Maintenance and care

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior.......... 338

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior........... 342

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements................... 345

General maintenance........ 347

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)

programs......................... 350

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ..................... 351

Hood ................................. 354

Positioning a floor jack ...... 356

Engine compartment......... 358

Tires .................................. 368

Tire inflation pressure ....... 376

Wheels .............................. 380

Air conditioning filter.......... 383

Wireless remote control

battery............................. 386

Checking and replacing

fuses ............................... 389

Light bulbs......................... 394

338

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

● Rear spoiler (if equipped) may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.

■ High pressure car washes

● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows and door borders, and high mounted stoplight.

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

339

■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.

● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.

● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

WARNING

■ When cleaning the windshield

● Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.

• When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand

• When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

• If something bumps against the windshield

• If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

● Installation area of front sensor on windshield: 

P. 176

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

340

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ Antenna installation and removal precautions

● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.

● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.

■ To prevent damage to the antenna

Remove the antenna in the following situations:

● When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage or other such places

● When a car cover is to be used to cover the vehicle

341

NOTICE

■ When using a high pressure car wash

● When washing the vehicle, do not let water of the high pressure washer hit directly or the vicinity of the camera. Due to the shock from the high pressure water, it is possible the device may not operate as normal.

● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

342

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

343

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.

Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components, etc., to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

( 

P. 38)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

344

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

● Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield

Be careful not to touch the front sensor (

 P. 173).

If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, PCS, LDA and Automatic High

Beam may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

345

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

346

 P. 85), turn the engine

■ Resetting the maintenance required reminder light (except Canada)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the reminder light.

To reset the reminder light, follow the procedures described below:

Switch the display to the trip meter “A” when the engine is running.

(

 P. 85)

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

While pressing the display change button (

switch to the “ON” position (do not start the engine because reset mode will be canceled). Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Handling of the battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. ( 

P. 365)

347

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Battery

Items

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser

Washer fluid

Check points

Check the battery fluid and connections. ( 

P. 365)

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

( 

P. 364)

Is the engine coolant at the correct level?(

 P. 362)

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

( 

P. 359)

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.

( 

P. 363)

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

( 

P. 367)

348

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Check points

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly

(without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

Brakes

Clutch pedal

Head restraints

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

( 

P. 466)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

( 

P. 466)

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

• Does the clutch pedal move smoothly?

• Does the clutch pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

• Does the clutch pedal have the correct amount of free play?

( 

P. 465)

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights • Do all the lights come on?

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake lever move smoothly?

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Items

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

349

Check points

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items

Doors

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tire

Check points

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

WARNING

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

350

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Do-it-yourself service precautions

351

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Battery condition

(

 P. 365)

Brake fluid level

(



level (

Items

P. 364)

Engine coolant

 P. 362)

Engine oil level

(

 P. 359)

Parts and tools

• Warm water • Baking soda • Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

• Distilled water

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703;

FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology

 Except Canada

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

 Canada

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

352

Items

Fuses

(

 P. 389)

Parts and tools

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs

(

 P. 394)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench

Radiator and condenser

(

 P. 363)

Tire inflation pressure

(

 P. 376)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source



Washer fluid

(

 P. 367)

Windshield wiper/ rear window wiper

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.

• The wiper blades should clear the windshield/rear window without streaking or skipping.

353

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc., right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel on the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position.

With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( 

P. 363)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

354

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.

355

WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■ When opening the hood

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.

NOTICE

■ When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod not clipped could cause the hood to bend.

356

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safety.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆ Front

◆ Rear

NOTICE

■ When raising your vehicle

Do not jack the vehicle at the suspension. The suspension may be damaged.

Suspension

357

Front

358

Engine compartment

Fuse boxes (

 P. 389)

Engine oil filler cap

(

 P. 360)

Battery (

 P. 365)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

 P. 364)

Radiator (

 P. 363)

Condenser

Electric cooling fan

(

 P. 363)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

 P. 362)

Engine oil level dipstick

(

 P. 359)

Washer fluid tank (

 P. 367)

359

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

3 Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

360

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection 

P. 462

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

Items

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

361

WARNING

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

362

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

 Except Canada

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

 Canada

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

363

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If any of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

364

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

Item

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703;

FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

365

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

366

WARNING

■ Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations:

● A washer does not work.

● The warning light comes on (if equipped).

367

WARNING

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

368

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “  ” mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

369

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Vehicles with P195/50R16 tires:

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

Front

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (

 P. 424)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. ( 

P. 370)

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● For vehicles with P195/50R16 tires, when rotating front and rear tires which have different tire inflation pressures

● When changing the tire size

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

370

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch to the

“LOCK” position.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

Adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. ( 

P. 467)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

4 Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

5 Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

◆ Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

371

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 195/50R16 tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

372

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. ( 

P. 472)

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. ( 

P. 219)

373

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings has not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been completed, the warning light comes on after blinks for 1 minute.

■ Certification for the tire pressure warning system

FCC ID: PAXPMVC010

FCC ID: HYQ23AAD

NOTE:

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

374

WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

● Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

375

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. ( 

P. 369)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 195/50R16 tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

376

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( 

P. 467)

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

377

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

378

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy

● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

● Reduced tire life due to wear

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

379

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire and wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

380

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset * .

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)

● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

381

■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The wheels of your vehicle, except for the compact spare tire, are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. ( 

P. 369)

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel nuts

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward.

Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

■ Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.

382

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Air conditioning filter

383

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

Open the glove box and slide off the damper.

3 Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the upper claws.

4 Pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.

384

Remove the filter cover.

Unlock the filter cover.

2 Move the filter cover in the direction of the arrow, and then pull it out of the claws.

6 Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “  UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

385

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

■ When removing the glove box

Always follow the specified procedure to remove the glove box ( 

P. 383). If

the glove box is removed without following the specified procedure, the hinge of the glove box may become damaged.

■ To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged.

386

Wireless remote control battery



Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

● Flathead screwdriver

● Lithium battery CR2016

Replacing the battery



Type A

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a tape.

2 Remove the module.

3 Open the battery cover using a coin protected with tape etc., and remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.



: If equipped



Type B

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a tape.

To prevent the buttons from being disassembled, face the button surface downward.

2 Remove the module.

387

3 Open the case cover and remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

388

■ Use a CR2016 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■ If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

■ When replacing the module (type B only)

Replace the module from right above.

Replacing it from diagonally above may prevent the key buttons from operating properly.

WARNING

■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

389

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.



Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

 Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

390



Engine compartment: type C fuse box

1 Pull the rubber strip on the edge to unhook it from the cover, and then push the tabs in and lift the cover off.

2 Remove the battery terminal cover and then the fuse box cover.

 Instrument panel

Remove the lid.

3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

391

Check if the fuse is blown.

Normal fuse

2 Blown fuse

From Type A to E:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type F:

Contact your Toyota dealer.

 Type A  Type B

 Type C

 Type E



Type D

Type F

392

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (

 P. 394)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

■ When replacing light bulbs

Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

■ When reinstalling the cover (type C fuse box)

Reinstall the cover, and then hook the rubber strip’s groove onto the cover.

WARNING

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

393

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

394

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your

Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (

 P. 468)

Bulb locations

■ Front

 Reflector type headlights

 Projector type headlights

Headlights and daytime running lights (if equipped)

Front turn signal lights and parking lights

Front side marker lights

Headlights

Front turn signal lights

Front fog lights (if equipped)

■ Rear

395

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlights and daytime running lights (if equipped)

 Vehicles with reflector type headlights

1 Unplug the connector.

2 Remove the rubber cover.

396

Release the bulb retaining spring.

Push the bulb retaining spring and release from the hook.

2 Lift the bulb retaining spring.

4 Remove the bulb.

5 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting and insert.

Install the bulb retaining spring.

Lower the bulb retaining spring.

2 Push the bulb retaining spring and then engage and fix the hook.

Install the rubber cover.

Ensure the rubber cover is securely attached.

Fit the rubber cover outer circumference in firmly.

Fit the rubber cover around the light bulb in until the light bulb plug can be seen.

Plug the connector.

397

 Vehicles with projector type headlights

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb out while pressing the lock release of the connector.

398

Replace the light bulb, plug the connector, and then install the bulb base.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting and insert.

Turn and secure the bulb base.

Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

■ Front turn signal lights and parking lights/front turn signal lights

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

2 Remove the light bulb.

3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■ Front side marker lights

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

399

2 Remove the light bulb

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■ Front fog lights (if equipped)

Turn the steering wheel and change the tire direction to the opposite direction of light to be exchanged.

2 Remove the bolt.

400

3 Remove the fender liner retainer.

4 Partly remove the fender liner until the light bulb is visible.

5 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

6 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise and remove.

7 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.

401

78 Turn and secure the bulb.

79 Plug the connector.

Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the front fog light, on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

10 Install the fender liner.

Attach the end of the fender liner to the inside of the front bumper.

402

11 Attach the fender liner retainer.

12 Install the bolt.

■ Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, and rear turn signal lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To prevent damaging the vehicle, wrap the screwdriver with a tape.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Rear turn signal light

Remove the light bulb.

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Rear turn signal light

403

Install the new bulb.

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Rear turn signal light

Turn and secure the bulb base.

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Rear turn signal light

Install the cover.

Align the cover claws with the notches.

2 Press the cover until it is fixed.

404

■ Back-up light

Open the back door and remove the cover.

Press down on the notch on the cover and remove the cover.

It is recommended for safeguarding to wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a cloth, etc., in order to prevent scratches to the vehicle.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 Replace the light bulb.

5 Install the bulb base.

405

6 Install the back door cover.

Align the cover 2 tabs on the cover and install.

■ License plate light

1 Open the back door until the license plate light can be seen.

Remove the lens.

Insert a small flathead screwdriver, etc. into either the right or left hole of the lens.

Lens

2 Push the screwdriver sideways in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration, disengage the hook, and then remove the lens.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with tape.

Fitting portion

406

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 Install a new light bulb.

Install the lens.

Fit the lens into either the right or left hooks.

Push the lens into place.

After installation, confirm that the lens is properly installed by gently pulling it.

Hooks

407

■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

● Parking lights (vehicles with projector type headlights)

● Daytime running lights (if equipped on projector type headlights)

● High mounted stoplight

■ LED Lights

The parking lights (LED type), daytime running lights (LED type) and high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ When replacing light bulbs



P. 392

408

Emergency flashers .......... 410

WARNING

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

409

When trouble arises

8-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in

an emergency ................. 411

If the vehicle is trapped

in rising water.................. 413

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to

be towed ......................... 414

If you think something is

wrong .............................. 419

Fuel pump shut off

system ............................ 420

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds ............................ 421

If you have a flat tire.......... 431

If the engine will not

start................................. 446

If the vehicle battery is

discharged ...................... 448

If your vehicle overheats ... 451

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ............................... 454

410

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not running, the battery may discharge.

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

411

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

 If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the engine.

 If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the “ACC” position.

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

412

WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

● Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water

413

In the event the vehicle is submerged in water, remain calm and perform the following.

● Remove the seat belt first.

● If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.

● If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and exit the vehicle through the window.

● If the window can not be opened using the power window switch, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle.

WARNING

■ Using an emergency hammer

for emergency escape

The front side windows and rear side windows, as well as the rear window can be shattered with an emergency hammer

used for emergency escape.

However, an emergency hammer can not shatter the windshield as it is laminated glass.

: Contact your Toyota dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about an emergency hammer.

■ Escaping the vehicle from the window

There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not possible due to seating position, passenger body type, etc.

When using an emergency hammer, consider your seat location and the size of the window opening to ensure that the opening is accessible and large enough to escape.

414

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/ provincial and local laws.

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

 From the front  From the rear

415

Release the parking brake.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

Using a flatbed truck

If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

After transporting, return the covers that were attached to the rear side.

Front

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

416

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing eyelets may be used.

Emergency towing procedure

Take out the towing eyelet. ( 

P. 432)

Remove the eyelet cover.

 Type A

Push down the upper part of the eyelet cover remove the upper claw, and then pull on the eyelet cover to disengage it from the front grille.

Claws

 Type B

Turn the eyelet cover.

417

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

 Type A  Type B

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.

 Type A  Type B

Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be shifted (automatic transmission):

 P. 151

■ While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■ Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the luggage. (

 P. 432)

418

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged.

■ While towing

● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.

● Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the

“LOCK” position or the key is removed.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

If you think something is wrong

419

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● High engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or comes on

● Low engine coolant temperature indicator comes on or does not come on continuously

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

● Engine misfire, stumbling or running roughly

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

420

Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

421

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light

(Except Canada)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer

* 1

)

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(Red warning light flashes or comes on)

High engine coolant temperature warning light

Indicates that the engine is overheating.

As the coolant temperature rises, it changes from flashing to steady on.



P. 451

422

Warning light

(Except Canada)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(Except Canada)

(Canada)

(Flashes or illuminates)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Electric power steering system warning light

(warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

PCS warning light

When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:

Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicate that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.

 Possible causes and corrective actions ( 

P. 177)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.



P. 188

423

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The VSC system;

• The TRAC system; or

• The hill-start assist control system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(Yellow)

Automatic High Beam indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High Beam system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Cruise control indicator

* 2

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(Yellow)

LDA indicator and lane marker indicators

Indicates a malfunction in the LDA system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Open door warning light (warning buzzer

* 3

)

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.

 Check that all the side doors and back door are closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates that remaining fuel is about 1.5 gal. (5.8 L,

1.3 Imp.gal.) or less.

 Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

(warning buzzer

* 4

)

Warns the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts

 Fasten the seat belt.

If the passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

424

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

Tire pressure warning light (except Canada)

When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as

• Natural causes (

 P. 427)

• Flat tire (

 P. 431)

 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

( 

P. 428)

 Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

* 2

Indicate that the washer fluid level is low.

 Add washer fluid (

 P. 367)

Maintenance required reminder light (except Canada)

Indicates that maintenance is required according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule.

* 5

Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about

15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the reminder light has been reset.

 If necessary, perform maintenance.

Comes on and remains on if the distance driven exceeds

5000 miles (8000 km) after the reminder light has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the reminder light has been reset.)

 Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the reminder light after the maintenance is performed.

( 

P. 346)

425

* 1

: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

* 2

: If equipped

* 3

: Open door warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or more with any door open.

* 4

: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s and passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” or “START” position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. The buzzer sounds once if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds elapse, the buzzer will sound intermittently for approximately 10 seconds, followed by a different tone for approximately 20 more seconds.

* 5

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

426

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator, “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. ( 

P. 36)

■ Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sounds.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

427

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are not registered in the tire pressure warning computer

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm

2 higher

or bar) or

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby

● If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used

428

 P. 486) However, Toyota recommends that the seat

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for

1 minute when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.

(Customizable features

belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger when seat belts are not fastened.

WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the

ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

429

WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tire (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

430

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If you have a flat tire

431

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires:

 P. 368

WARNING

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).

● Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers. (

 P. 410)

432

Location of the spare tire, jack and tool bag

■ Location

Jack

Spare tire

Tool bag

Jack handle

Tie-down belt

Wheel nut wrench

Towing eyelet

Deck board (if equipped)

Luggage floor cover

433

WARNING

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

434

Taking out the jack

1 Move the driver’s seat to the front most position and remove the cover.

Take out the jack.

For tightening

For loosening

435

Taking out the spare tire

Vehicles with a deck board: Lift the deck board and pull it toward you to remove it. (

 P. 333)

Remove the luggage floor cover.

3 Remove the spare wheel cushion (if equipped), then loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

436

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

For vehicles with full cover wheel ornament, remove the wheel ornament using the wrench.

To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament.

If the wheel ornament has notches, insert the wrench into the notch and remove the wheel ornament.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

4 Turn the tire jack portion by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

437

6 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

438

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:

• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc., may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf

(103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (

 P. 381)

439

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel with a compact spare tire, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

3 Lower the vehicle.

440

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

Stow the jack and all tools.

Vehicles with a deck board: return the deck board.

3 Vehicles with an aluminum wheels, remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

4 Hook each belt end to the corresponding anchor brackets.

Put the center portion of the belt onto the rear center head restraint.

5 Lay the flat tire on the luggage floor so that the outer side of the tire wheel faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Detach the rear center head restraint from the seat and release the belt.

6 Pass the belt through the center hole of the flat tire wheel.

441

7 Put the center portion of the belt onto the rear center head restraint position and then return the rear center head restraint.

8 Hold the buckle and pull the belt to secure the tire.

After stowing the flat tire, check that the tire and belt are secured.

442

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(

 P. 467)

■ After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. ( 

P. 370)

■ When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is equipped

The vehicle height may become lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the front tires.

443

WARNING

■ When using the compact spare tire

● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When storing the compact spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• EPS

• Cruise control

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

• Automatic High Beam

: If equipped

444

WARNING

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ When stowing the flat tire

● Make sure the rear seats are in their original position.

● Secure it using a tire tie-down belt. Otherwise, the flat tire may fly out in case of the sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

445

NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

P. 369)

446

P. 146), consider each of the follow-

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( 

ing points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.

( 

P. 146)

● Vehicles with engine immobilizer system: There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. ( 

P. 74)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 448)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

447

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 448)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

448

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

Open the hood. ( 

P. 354)

2 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

1 3

4 2

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.

Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

449

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ To prevent battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is not running.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

450

WARNING

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with anything other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or engine drive belt.

If your vehicle overheats

451

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

● The high engine coolant temperature warning light (

 P. 421)

comes on or flashes, or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

● Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“FULL”

“LOW”

Radiator cap

452

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fan is operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

453

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan and belts while the engine is operating.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust, etc.,).

● Do not use any coolant additives.

454

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P

(automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to D or R (automatic transmission) or 1 or R

(manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.

■ Emergency hooks

When your vehicle becomes stuck and cannot move, the emergency hooks are used for another vehicle to pull your vehicle out in an emergency.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow another vehicle.

455

WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever (automatic transmission)

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

456

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 458

457

Vehicle specifications

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

Fuel information ................ 469

Tire information ................. 472

9-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 486

Items to initialize ............... 488

458

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

* 1

Wheelbase

Front

Tread

Rear

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage)

* 1

: Unladen vehicles

* 2

: P175/65R15 tires

* 3

: P195/50R16 tires

155.3 in. (3945 mm)

66.7 in. (1695 mm)

59.4 in. (1510 mm)

98.8 in. (2510 mm)

58.0 in. (1475 mm)

57.6 in. (1465 mm)

* 2

* 3

57.4 in. (1460 mm)

57.2 in. (1455 mm)

* 2

* 3

845 lb. (380 kg)

459

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped under the front passenger’s seat.

This number is stamped on the top left side of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certification Label on the driver’s side of the center pillar.

460

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

461

1NZ-FE

4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

2.95  3.33 in. (75.0  84.7 mm)

91.3 cu.in.

(1497 cm

)

68 — 90 lbf (300 — 400 N, 31 — 41kgf)

 Vehicles without an air conditioning system

Generator

Drive belt tension

Water pump

Crankshaft

 Vehicles with an air conditioning system

Generator

Crankshaft

Water pump

Air conditioning compressor

: Drive belt tension measured with Boroughs drive belt tension gauge No. BT-33-73F when the engine is cold (used belt)

462

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

11.1 gal. (42 L, 9.2 Imp.gal.)

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill

-reference

)

With filter

Without filter

3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)

3.6 qt. (3.4 L, 3.0 Imp.qt.)

: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use

Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W-30 is not available,

SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.

However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

463

Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

Cooling system

Capacity

(Reference)

Coolant type

 Automatic transmission

4.9 qt. (4.6 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)

 Manual transmission

5.0 qt. (4.7 L, 4.1 Imp.qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

464

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSOSK16R11

NGKIFR5A11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage

68°F (20°C):

Charging rates

at 12.3 V or higher

If the specific voltage is lower than the standard value, charge the battery.

(

: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off.)

5 A max.

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity

Fluid type

6.8 qt. (6.4 L, 5.6 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

: The fluid capacity is the reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.

465

Manual transmission

Gear oil capacity

(Reference)

Gear oil type

2.0 qt. (1.9 L, 1.7 Imp.qt.)

“TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission Gear

Oil LV GL-4 75W” or equivalent

NOTICE

■ Manual transmission gear oil

● Please be aware that depending on the particular characteristics of the gear oil used or the operating conditions, idle sound, shift feeling and/or fuel efficiency may be different or affected and, in the worst case, damage to the vehicle's transmission. Toyota recommends to use “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” to achieve optimal performance.

● Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission

Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” at the factory. Use Toyota approved “TOYOTA

Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” or an equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Clutch

Pedal free play

Fluid type

0.2 — 0.6 in. (5 — 15 mm)

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3;

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4

466

Brakes

Pedal clearance

* 1

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Brake lining wear limit

Parking brake lever travel

Fluid type

* 2

 Rear drum brakes

3.2 in. (81 mm) Min.

 Rear disc brakes

3.3 in. (84 mm) Min.

0.04 — 0.24 in. (1 — 6 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

 Rear drum brakes

8 — 11 clicks

 Rear disc brakes

6 — 9 clicks

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3;

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N,

31 kgf) while the engine is running

* 2

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N,

20 kgf)

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

467

Tires and wheels

 15-inch tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P175/65R15 84H

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm 2

Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm 2

or bar)

Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

15  5 1/2J

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)



16-inch tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P195/50R16 83V

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

Rear:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

16  6J

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

 Compact spare tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

T125/70D16 96M

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar)

Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

16  4T

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

468

Light bulbs

Exterior

Interior

Light Bulbs

Headlights and daytime running lights (if equipped)

Reflector type

Projector type

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights/ parking lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Back-up lights

License plate light

Personal lights/interior light

Luggage compartment light

Bulb No

9003

—

921

—

60/55

7444NA 28/8

—

7443

21/5

A: HB2 halogen bulbs

C: H16 halogen bulbs

E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

G: Double end bulbs

B: HIR2 halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

F: Single end bulbs (clear)

Type

469

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

470

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.

● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled

E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than

15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than

15% ethanol.

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

471

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

472

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

 Full-size tire

 Compact spare tire

473

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

Tire ply composition and materials

(

 P. 475)

(

 P. 474)

(

 P. 368)

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 479)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 479)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.

A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

Summer tires or all season tires (

 P. 372)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

474

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

 Type A  Type B

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

8 Manufacturer’s code

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

■

7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

475

476

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

477

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

■

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

■

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

478

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

■

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

479

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Normal occupant weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that follows

480

Tire related term

Occupant distribution

Production options weight

Rim

Meaning

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1

below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1

below), and dividing by two

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

Extra load tire

Groove

481

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

482

Tire related term

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Meaning

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Tire related term

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

483

Meaning

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

484

Tire related term

Snow tire

Meaning

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

)

Test rim

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Wheel-holding fixture

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

: Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

for U.S. owners........................ 490

485

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

486

9-2. Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer.

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system.

Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer.

■

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

Wireless remote control * ( 

P. 93, 97)

Function

Unlocking operation

Default setting

Customized setting

The driver’s door unlocked in one step, all the doors unlocked in two steps

All the doors unlocked in one step

1 2

— O

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

: If equipped

■ Door lock ( 

P. 97)

60 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

— O

Function

Unlocking using a key

Default setting

Customized setting

The driver’s door unlocked in one step, all the doors unlocked in two steps

All the doors unlocked in one step

1 2

— O

■ Automatic light off system * (

 P. 156)

9-2. Customization

Function

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

Default setting

30 seconds

Customized setting

0 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

: Vehicles with daytime running lights

■ Daytime running lights * (

 P. 158)

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Daytime running light system (except for Canada)

: If equipped

■ Seat belt reminder buzzer ( 

P. 423)

Off

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

On Off

487

O O

— O

WARNING

■ During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

488

9-2. Customization

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item

Maintenance required reminder light

(except Canada)

When to initialize

After the maintenance is performed

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

When rotating the tires on vehicles with differing front and rear tire inflation pressures

Reference

P. 346

P. 370

For owners

Reporting safety defects

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 491

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) .............................. 493

489

490

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

491

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité

● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant pas toucher le cou ni glisser de l’épaule.

● Placez la sangle abdominale de la ceinture de sécurité le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier du siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège.

● Ne pas vriller la ceinture de sécurité.

Entretien et soin

■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savonneuse tiède. Par ailleurs, vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

492

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Port de la ceinture de sécurité

● Ne pas passer la sangle diagonale sous le bras.

● Faites toujours passer votre ceinture de sécurité au plus bas sur vos hanches et bien dans l’axe.

■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune garantie de protection de l’occupant contre des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

■ Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière

Ne pas utiliser la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière avec une de ses deux boucles déverrouillée.

Si une seule des boucles est verrouillée, tout freinage brusque ou collision peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

493

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

494

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux

Coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/passager avant

Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l’habitacle

Coussin gonflable SRS de genoux pour le conducteur

Participe à la protection du conducteur

Coussins gonflables SRS d’assise de siège

Participe à retenir le conducteur et le passager avant

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux

Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux places avant

Coussins gonflables SRS rideau

● Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis dans les sièges des places extérieures

● Participent à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de retournement de celui-ci

Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS

495

Coussins gonflables rideau

Capteurs d’impact latéral

(avant)

Coussins gonflables latéraux

Capteurs d’impact latéral

(arrière)

Témoin d’alerte SRS

Coussin gonflable conducteur

Coussin gonflable d’assise de siège passager

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant

Prétensionneurs et limiteurs d’effort de ceinture de sécurité

Capteurs d’impact latéral

(porte avant)

Coussin gonflable d’assise de siège du conducteur

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur

Coussin gonflable de genoux conducteur

Capteurs d’impact avant

Boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables

Système de classification d’occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

Coussin gonflable passager avant

Témoins indicateurs “AIR

BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”

496

Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS, dont la conception est basée sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules automobiles américains (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les informations reçues des capteurs, etc. détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus de composition du système pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables. Ces informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.

497

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables

SRS.

À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable.

Conseils de la National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA):

Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) du déploiement, placezvous à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur pour garantir une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de

10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:

• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre confortablement les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules puissent

être différents les uns des autres, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.

• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et le cou.

Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue des commandes au tableau de bord.

498

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles des ceintures de sièges avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux déterminent que le conducteur et le passager avant portent leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même qu’elle n’est pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux risquent de ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, causant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.

● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement que tous les nourrissons et enfants soient installés dans les sièges arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.

● N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d’accident, la force exercée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable passager peut causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles à un enfant, si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège passager avant.

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du siège et ne pas s’appuyer contre la planche de bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant debout face au coussin gonflable SRS passager avant ni assis sur les genoux d’un passager avant.

● Ne pas laisser les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.

● Ne pas s’appuyer contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

● Interdisez à quiconque de s’agenouiller sur le siège passager en appui contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la planche de bord, la garniture centrale du volant de direction et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.

Ces objets risquent de se transformer en projectiles lors du déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS conducteur, passager et de genoux conducteur.

499

500

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

● Ne pas attacher à la clé des objets lourds, pointus ou très durs, comme d’autres clés par exemple. Ces objets risquent d’entraver le déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de genoux conducteur ou d’être projetés en direction du siège conducteur par la force de déploiement, constituant ainsi un danger potentiel.

● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet dur. En cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideau, tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le coussin gonflable SRS de genoux conducteur se déploie, veillez à l’enlever.

● N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et des coussins gonflables SRS d’assise de siège, car il risquerait d’en gêner le déploiement.

De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux et d’assise de siège de fonctionner correctement, neutraliser le système ou provoquer le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux et d’assise de siège, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant les composants des coussins gonflables SRS.

En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.

501

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.

Retirez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la peau.

● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture centrale du volant de direction et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.

● Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter normalement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du passager avant peuvent ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.

■ Modification et élimination en fin de vie des éléments du système de coussins gonflables SRS

Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin d’intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l’une des modifications suivantes. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des coussins gonflables

SRS

● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit

● Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de l’habitacle

● Installation d’une protection de calandre (pare-buffle ou pare-kangourou, etc.), d’un chasse-neige, d’un treuil

● Modification des suspensions du véhicule

● Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’un émetteur/récepteur radio ou lecteur de CD

● Aménagements apportés au véhicule pour une personne atteinte d’un handicap physique.

502

503

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) .................... 504

Alphabetical index ..................... 507

For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the multimedia system.

Audio system types: 

P. 226

504

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

● If you lose your keys, new genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (

 P. 94)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (

 P. 386)

● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. ( 

P. 94)

The rear door cannot be opened (5-door models only)

● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( 

P. 100)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

505

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

● Vehicles with a manual transmission:

Did you turn the key while firmly depressing the clutch pedal? ( 

P. 146)

● Vehicles with an automatic transmission:

Is the shift lever in P? ( 

P. 146)

● Is the battery discharged? (

 P. 448)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

● Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in the “ON” position. (

 P. 151)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped

● It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is pulled from the engine switch. (

 P. 147)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (

 P. 123)

506

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Is the driver wearing the seat belts? (

 P. 423)

● The parking brake indicator is on

Is the parking brake released? (

 P. 421)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.

( 

When a warning light turns on, refer to P. 421.

A warning light turns on

●

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. ( 

P. 431)

The vehicle becomes stuck

● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. ( 

P. 454)

Alphabetical index

507

Alphabetical index

A/C ............................................ 316

Air conditioning filter ............. 383

Manual air conditioning

system ................................ 316

ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) .................................. 213

Function ................................ 213

Air conditioning filter .............. 383

Air conditioning system.......... 316

Air conditioning filter ............. 383

Manual air conditioning

system ................................ 316

Airbags ....................................... 36

Airbag operating conditions .... 44

Airbag precautions for

your child .............................. 39

Airbag warning light .............. 422

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ............. 44

Curtain shield airbag

precautions........................... 39

Front passenger occupant

classification system............. 49

General airbag precautions .... 39

Locations of airbags................ 36

Modification and

disposal of airbags ............... 43

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................. 44

Side airbag precautions .......... 39

Side and curtain shield airbags operating

conditions ............................. 44

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions .............. 39

SRS airbags............................ 36

Anchor brackets ........................ 59

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) ...................................... 213

Function................................ 213

Assist grips.............................. 336

Audio input

............................ 230

Audio remote control switches

............................... 229

Audio system

......................... 227

Antenna ................................ 244

Audio input............................ 230

Audio settings ....................... 236

AUX port/USB port ............... 230

Bluetooth

audio .................. 274

CD player.............................. 245

Display settings .................... 237

General settings ................... 234

iPod ...................................... 251

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 245

Portable music player ........... 260

Radio .................................... 243

Setup menu .......................... 233

USB memory ........................ 255

Voice settings ....................... 238

Automatic High Beam ............. 194

Automatic transmission ......... 149

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 151

AUX port

................................. 230

: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”

508

Alphabetical index

Back door

Back door.............................. 102

Luggage compartment

light..................................... 103

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulb .............. 404

Battery ...................................... 365

If the battery is discharged.... 448

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 219

Warning light......................... 421

Bottle holders .......................... 330

Brake

Fluid ...................................... 466

Parking brake........................ 155

Warning light......................... 421

Brake assist ............................. 213

Break-in tips ............................ 129

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control................................... 84

Care .................................. 338, 342

Aluminum wheels ................. 339

Exterior ................................. 338

Interior .................................. 342

Seat belts.............................. 343

CD player

............................... 245

Chains ...................................... 220

Child restraint system............... 57

Fixed with a LATCH

system.................................. 69

Fixed with a seat belt.............. 63

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............ 49

Points to remember ................ 57

Riding with children ................ 56

Types of child restraint system installation

method ................................. 59

Using an anchor bracket......... 72

Child safety ................................ 56

Airbag precautions.................. 39

Back door precautions.......... 104

Battery precautions............... 365

Child restraint system ............. 57

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 31

Installing child restraints ......... 57

Power window lock switch .... 123

Power window precautions... 124

Rear door child-protectors .... 100

Removed key battery

precautions......................... 388

Seat belt precautions.............. 32

Alphabetical index

509

Child-protectors....................... 100

Cleaning ........................... 338, 342

Aluminum wheels.................. 339

Exterior ................................. 338

Interior................................... 342

Seat belts.............................. 343

Clock........................................... 87

Clutch ....................................... 465

Condenser................................ 363

Coolant ..................................... 362

Capacity................................ 463

Checking............................... 362

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 219

Cooling system........................ 362

Engine overheating............... 451

CRS (Child Restraint

System) .................................... 57

Cruise control .......................... 199

Warning lights ....................... 423

Cup holders.............................. 329

Curtain shield airbags............... 36

Customizable features ............ 486

Deck board............................... 333

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 320

Rear window......................... 320

Windshield ............................ 319

Dimensions .............................. 458

Display

Drive information .................... 86

Fuel consumption

information ........................... 89

Multi-information display......... 85

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 351

Door lock

Back door ............................. 102

Side doors .............................. 97

Wireless remote control.......... 93

Doors

Back door ............................. 102

Door glasses......................... 123

Door lock ................................ 97

Open door warning buzzer ... 423

Open door warning light ....... 423

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 121

Rear door child-protector...... 100

Side doors .............................. 97

Side windows........................ 123

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light ........................................ 423

Driving ...................................... 126

Break-in tips.......................... 129

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Procedures ........................... 126

Winter drive tips.................... 219

: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”

510

Alphabetical index

Eco Driving Indicator Light..... 130

Electric Power Steering

(EPS)....................................... 213

Function ................................ 213

Emergency flashers ................ 410

Emergency, in case of

If the engine will not start ...... 446

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.......................... 448

If the vehicle is trapped

in rising water ..................... 413

If the warning buzzer

sounds................................ 421

If the warning light

turns on .............................. 421

If you have a flat tire ............. 431

If you lose your keys ............... 94

If you think something is

wrong.................................. 419

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 454

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ... 411

If your vehicle needs to be

towed.................................. 414

If your vehicle overheats....... 451

Engine

“ACC” position ...................... 146

Compartment........................ 358

Engine switch ....................... 146

Hood ..................................... 354

How to start the engine......... 146

Identification number ............ 460

If the engine will not start...... 446

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency... 411

Ignition switch

(engine switch) ................... 146

Overheating .......................... 451

Engine coolant......................... 362

Capacity................................ 463

Checking............................... 362

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 219

Engine coolant temperature

warning light.......................... 421

Engine immobilizer system ...... 74

Engine oil ................................. 359

Capacity................................ 462

Checking............................... 359

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 219

Engine switch

(ignition switch) .................... 146

EPS (Electric Power

Steering) ................................ 213

Function................................ 213

Event data recorder................... 10

Alphabetical index

511

Flat tire...................................... 431

Floor mats .................................. 24

Fluid

Automatic transmission......... 464

Brake .................................... 466

Clutch................................... 465

Washer ................................. 367

Fog lights ................................. 161

Replacing light bulbs............. 399

Switch ................................... 161

seat belt reminder light......... 423

Front passenger’s

Front seats ............................... 107

Adjustment............................ 107

Cleaning................................ 342

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Head restraints ..................... 114

Front side marker lights.......... 156

Replacing light bulbs............. 399

Front turn signal lights ........... 154

Replacing light bulbs............. 398

Capacity................................ 462

Fuel

Fuel gauge.............................. 83

Fuel pump shut off system ... 420

Information............................ 469

Refueling .............................. 169

Type.............................. 462, 469

Warning light......................... 423

Fuel consumption

information .............................. 89

Fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption ...... 86

Instantaneous fuel

consumption......................... 86

Fuel filler door ......................... 169

Refueling .............................. 169

Fuel pump shut off system..... 420

Fuses ........................................ 389

Gas station information .......... 520

Gauges ....................................... 83

Glove box ................................. 329

512

Alphabetical index

Hazard lights

Switch ................................... 410

Head restraints ........................ 114

Headlights ................................ 156

Automatic High Beam ........... 194

Replacing light bulbs............. 395

Heaters ..................................... 316

Manual air conditioning

system ................................ 316

Outside rear view mirrors...... 320

Seat heaters ......................... 324

High mounted stoplight

Replacing light bulbs............. 407

Hood ......................................... 354

Open ..................................... 354

Hooks

Retaining hooks (floor mat)..... 24

Horn .......................................... 117

Identification ............................ 459

Engine .................................. 460

Vehicle.................................. 459

Ignition switch

(engine switch)...................... 146

Illuminated entry system ........ 327

Immobilizer system ................... 74

Indicators ................................... 80

Initialization

Maintenance data ................. 346

Items to initialize ................... 488

Tire pressure warning

system................................ 370

Inside rear view mirror............ 119

Instrument panel light

control...................................... 84

Interior light ............................. 326

Switch ................................... 326

Positioning a floor jack.......... 356

Alphabetical index

513

Jack

Vehicle-equipped jack........... 432

Jack handle .............................. 432

Keyless entry

Wireless remote control .......... 93

Keys ............................................ 92

Engine switch........................ 146

If you lose your keys ............... 94

Ignition switch ....................... 146

Key number plate.................... 92

Keyless entry .......................... 93

Replacing the battery............ 386

Wireless remote control

key........................................ 93

Lane Departure Alert (LDA) .... 189

LATCH anchors ......................... 69

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) .... 189

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever.............. 354

Hood lock release lever ........ 354

Shift lever...................... 149, 153

Wiper lever ................... 163, 166

License plate lights ................. 156

Light switch........................... 156

Replacing light bulbs ............ 405

Replacing.............................. 394

Light bulbs

Automatic High Beam........... 194

Lights

Fog light switch..................... 161

Headlight switch ................... 156

Illuminated entry system....... 327

Interior light........................... 326

Interior lights list.................... 326

Luggage compartment

light..................................... 103

Personal lights ...................... 327

Replacing light bulbs ............ 394

Lock steering column ............. 147

Luggage cover......................... 332

514

Alphabetical index

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 351

Maintenance data ................. 458

Maintenance requirements ... 345

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 422

Manual transmission............... 153

Oil ......................................... 465

Meter ........................................... 83

Indicators ................................ 80

Instrument panel light

control................................... 84

Meters..................................... 83

Multi-information display ......... 85

Warning lights ......................... 79

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror .......... 119

Outside rear view mirrors...... 121

Vanity mirrors........................ 334

MP3 disc

................................. 245

Multi-information display.......... 85

Odometer.................................... 86

Oil

Engine oil .............................. 462

Manual transmission oil ........ 465

Opener

Back door.............................. 102

Fuel filler door ....................... 169

Hood ..................................... 354

Outside rear view mirrors ....... 121

Adjusting and folding ............ 121

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers ........................... 320

Overheating.............................. 451

Parking brake........................... 155

Operation.............................. 155

Parking brake engaged

warning buzzer................... 421

PCS

(Pre-Collision system) .......... 178

Function................................ 178

PCS switch ........................... 181

Personal lights......................... 327

Switch ................................... 327

Power outlet............................. 335

Power steering......................... 213

Power windows ....................... 123

Operation.............................. 123

Window lock switch .............. 123

Pre-Collision system

(PCS) ...................................... 178

Function................................ 178

PCS switch ........................... 181

Radiator .................................... 363

Alphabetical index

515

Radio

...................................... 243

Rear seat .................................. 110

Folding down the rear

seatbacks ........................... 110

Rear side marker lights........... 156

Rear turn signal lights............. 154

Inside rear view mirror .......... 119

Rear view mirror

Outside rear view mirrors...... 121

Rear view monitor ................... 203

Rear window defogger ............ 320

Rear window wiper .................. 166

Refueling .................................. 169

Capacity................................ 462

Fuel types ............................. 462

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 171

Replacing

Fuses .................................... 389

Light bulbs ............................ 394

Tires...................................... 431

Wireless remote control

battery ................................ 386

Resetting the maintenance

required reminder light......... 346

Seat belt reminder light .......... 423

Seat belts ................................... 28

Automatic locking retractor

(ALR).................................... 31

Child restraint system

installation ............................ 59

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belt........................ 343

Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR).................................... 31

How to wear your seat belt ..... 28

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 31

Pregnant women, proper

seat belt use......................... 33

Reminder light and buzzer.... 423

Seat belt pretensioners........... 31

SRS warning light ................. 422

Seat heaters ............................. 324

Seats................................. 107, 110

Adjustment............................ 107

Adjustment precautions ........ 109

Child seats/child restraint

system installation................ 57

Cleaning ............................... 342

Folding down the rear

seatbacks ........................... 110

Head restraints ..................... 114

Properly sitting in the seat ...... 26

Sensor

Automatic High Beam........... 194

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert) ....... 189

PCS

(Pre-Collision system) ........ 178

: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”

516

Alphabetical index

Shift lever ......................... 149, 153

Automatic transmission......... 149

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................ 151

Manual transmission............. 153

Shift lock system ..................... 150

Side airbags ............................... 36

Side doors .................................. 97

Side mirrors ............................. 121

Adjusting and folding ............ 121

Snow tires ................................ 219

Spare tire .................................. 431

Inflation pressure .................. 467

Storage location.................... 432

Spark plug ................................ 464

Specifications .......................... 458

Speedometer.............................. 83

Steering lock ............................ 147

Steering wheel ......................... 117

Adjustment............................ 117

Audio switches...................... 229

Stop lights

Storage feature ........................ 328

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 454

Sun visors ................................ 334

Switches

Audio remote control

switches ............................. 229

Automatic High Beam

switch ................................. 194

Cruise control switch ............ 199

Door lock switch ..................... 99

Emergency flashers switch... 410

Engine switch ....................... 146

Fog light switch..................... 161

Hazard switch ....................... 410

Ignition switch ....................... 146

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert) switch........................ 189

Light switch........................... 156

Outside rear view mirror

switches ............................. 121

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) switch ................... 181

Power door lock switch........... 99

Power window switches........ 123

Rear window defogger

switch ................................. 320

Rear window wiper and

washer switch..................... 166

Seat heater switches ............ 324

Talk switch

.......................... 309

Telephone switch

............... 288

Tire pressure warning

reset switch ........................ 370

VSC off switch ...................... 214

Window lock switch .............. 123

Windshield wipers and

washer switch..................... 163

Alphabetical index

517

Tachometer ................................ 83

Tail lights.................................. 156

Engine immobilizer system ..... 74

Talk switch

............................. 309

Telephone switch

.................. 288

Theft deterrent system

Tire inflation pressure............. 376

Maintenance data ................. 467

system.................................... 369

Tire pressure warning

Function ................................ 369

Initializing .............................. 370

Installing tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters......................... 369

Registering ID codes ............ 370

Tire pressure warning reset

switch ................................. 370

Tires .......................................... 368

Chains................................... 220

Checking............................... 368

If you have a flat tire ............. 431

Inflation pressure .................. 467

Replacing.............................. 431

Rotating tires......................... 369

Size....................................... 467

Snow tires ............................. 219

Spare tire .............................. 431

Tire pressure warning

reset switch ........................ 370

Tools......................................... 432

Top tether strap ......................... 72

Towing

Emergency towing ................ 414

Dinghy towing ............... 143, 144

Towing eyelet ....................... 416

Trailer towing ........................ 142

Toyota Safety sense C ............ 172

Traction control ....................... 213

Transmission ................... 149, 153

Automatic transmission ........ 149

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................ 151

Manual transmission............. 153

Trip meters................................. 86

Turn signal lights .................... 154

Replacing light

bulbs........................... 398, 402

Vanity mirrors .......................... 334

USB memory

.......................... 255

USB/AUX port

........................ 230

Vehicle data recordings.............. 9

Vehicle identification

number................................... 459

Vehicle Stability Control

(VSC) ...................................... 213

VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) .................................. 213

: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”

518

Alphabetical index

Warning buzzers

Brake system ........................ 421

Key reminder ........................ 147

Open door............................. 423

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) .............................. 178

Seat belt reminder ................ 423

Warning lights............................ 79

ABS....................................... 422

Automatic High Beam

indicator.............................. 423

Brake system ........................ 421

Charging system................... 421

Cruise control indicator ......... 423

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light...................... 423

Electric power steering

system ................................ 422

High engine coolant

temperature ........................ 421

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

indicator.............................. 423

Low engine oil pressure........ 421

Low fuel level ........................ 423

Low windshield washer

fluid..................................... 424

Maintenance required

reminder light...................... 424

Malfunction indicator lamp .... 422

Open door............................. 423

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) .............................. 422

Slip indicator ......................... 423

SRS ...................................... 422

Tire pressure......................... 424

Washer ............................. 163, 166

Checking............................... 367

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 219

Switch ........................... 163, 166